1% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. 2% 3% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. 4\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi 5% 6\def\texinfoversion{2017-06-04.19} 7% 8% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 9% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 10% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017 11% Free Software Foundation, Inc. 12% 13% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or 14% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as 15% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the 16% License, or (at your option) any later version. 17% 18% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be 19% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty 20% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU 21% General Public License for more details. 22% 23% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License 24% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>. 25% 26% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing 27% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without 28% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7 29% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3"). 30% 31% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug 32% reports; you can get the latest version from: 33% http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or 34% http://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or 35% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page) 36% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out 37% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. 38% 39% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a 40% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the 41% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated. 42% 43% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the 44% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple 45% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this: 46% tex foo.texi 47% texindex foo.?? 48% tex foo.texi 49% tex foo.texi 50% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps. 51% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct. 52% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more 53% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. 54% 55% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some 56% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the 57% full Texinfo distribution. 58% 59% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo. 60 61 62\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} 63 64% If in a .fmt file, print the version number 65% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because 66% they might have appeared in the input file name. 67\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% 68 \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} 69 70% LaTeX's \typeout. This ensures that the messages it is used for 71% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex. 72\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}% 73 74\chardef\other=12 75 76% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo. 77% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. 78\let\+ = \relax 79 80% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine. 81\let\ptexb=\b 82\let\ptexbullet=\bullet 83\let\ptexc=\c 84\let\ptexcomma=\, 85\let\ptexdot=\. 86\let\ptexdots=\dots 87\let\ptexend=\end 88\let\ptexequiv=\equiv 89\let\ptexexclam=\! 90\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote 91\let\ptexgtr=> 92\let\ptexhat=^ 93\let\ptexi=\i 94\let\ptexindent=\indent 95\let\ptexinsert=\insert 96\let\ptexlbrace=\{ 97\let\ptexless=< 98\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite 99\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent 100\let\ptexplus=+ 101\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright 102\let\ptexrbrace=\} 103\let\ptexslash=\/ 104\let\ptexsp=\sp 105\let\ptexstar=\* 106\let\ptexsup=\sup 107\let\ptext=\t 108\let\ptextop=\top 109{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode 110 111% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it 112% starts a new line in the output. 113\newlinechar = `^^J 114 115% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error 116% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. 117% 118\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined 119 \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0. 120\else 121 \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space} 122\fi 123 124% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. 125\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi 126\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi 127\ifx\putworderror\undefined \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi 128\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi 129\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi 130\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi 131\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi 132\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi 133\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi 134\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi 135\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi 136\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi 137\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi 138\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi 139\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi 140\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi 141\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi 142\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi 143\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi 144\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi 145% 146\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi 147\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi 148\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi 149\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi 150\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi 151\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi 152\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi 153\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi 154\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi 155\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi 156\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi 157\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi 158% 159\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi 160\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi 161\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi 162\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi 163\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi 164 165% Give the space character the catcode for a space. 166\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax} 167 168% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character. 169\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax} 170 171\chardef\dashChar = `\- 172\chardef\slashChar = `\/ 173\chardef\underChar = `\_ 174 175% Ignore a token. 176% 177\def\gobble#1{} 178 179% The following is used inside several \edef's. 180\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname} 181 182% Hyphenation fixes. 183\hyphenation{ 184 Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script 185 ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps 186 data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script 187 man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm 188 par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces 189 spell-ing spell-ings 190 stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space 191 wide-spread wrap-around 192} 193 194% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file 195% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, 196% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make 197% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log 198% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX. 199% 200\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% 201\def\loggingall{% 202 \tracingstats2 203 \tracingpages1 204 \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex 205 \tracingparagraphs1 206 \tracingoutput1 207 \tracingmacros2 208 \tracingrestores1 209 \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen 210 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging 211 \tracingscantokens1 212 \tracingifs1 213 \tracinggroups1 214 \tracingnesting2 215 \tracingassigns1 216 \fi 217 \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex 218 \errorcontextlines16 219}% 220 221% @errormsg{MSG}. Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things 222% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message, 223% after all. 224% 225\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg} 226\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}} 227 228% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing 229% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space. 230% 231\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount 232 \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi} 233\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount 234 \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi} 235\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount 236 \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi} 237 238% Output routine 239% 240 241% For a final copy, take out the rectangles 242% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided 243% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin). 244% 245\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt } 246 247% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. 248% 249\newif\ifcropmarks 250\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue 251% 252% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. 253% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 254% 255\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines 256\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc 257\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt 258\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in 259 260% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor. 261% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark. 262% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark. 263% 264% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct. 265% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase. 266% 267% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter 268% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top 269% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. 270 271% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one 272% mark before the section break, and one after. 273% In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs, 274% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs. 275% Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous 276% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section 277% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top. 278% @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark. 279% 280% See page 260 of The TeXbook. 281\def\domark{% 282 \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}% 283 \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}% 284 \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}% 285 \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}% 286 \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}% 287 \mark{% 288 \the\toks0 \the\toks2 % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top 289 \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6 % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom 290 \noexpand\else \the\toks8 % 2: color marks 291 }% 292} 293 294% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks, 295% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark. 296% 297% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title 298% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us 299% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g., 300% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very 301% first @chapter. 302\def\gettopheadingmarks{% 303 \ifcase0\topmark\fi 304 \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi 305} 306\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi} 307\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi} 308 309% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors. 310\def\lastchapterdefs{} 311\def\lastsectiondefs{} 312\def\lastsection{} 313\def\prevchapterdefs{} 314\def\prevsectiondefs{} 315\def\lastcolordefs{} 316 317% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. 318\newdimen\bindingoffset 319\newdimen\normaloffset 320\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight 321 322% Main output routine. 323% 324\chardef\PAGE = 255 325\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} 326 327\newbox\headlinebox 328\newbox\footlinebox 329 330% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. 331% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer, 332% cropmarks, and footnote. This also causes index entries for this page 333% to be written to the auxiliary files. 334% 335\def\onepageout#1{% 336 \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi 337 % 338 \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset 339 \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi 340 % 341 % Common context changes for both heading and footing. 342 % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in 343 % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). 344 \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars} 345 % 346 % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page, 347 % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the 348 % values in \headline and \footline. 349 % 350 % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter. 351 \ifcase1\topmark\fi 352 \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername 353 \ifcase0\firstmark\fi 354 \let\curchaptername\thischaptername 355 % 356 \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi 357 \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi 358 % 359 \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername 360 \let\thischapterheading\thischapter 361 \else 362 % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank 363 % for the first page of a chapter. This is to prevent the chapter name 364 % being shown twice. 365 \def\thischapterheading{}% 366 \fi 367 % 368 \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}% 369 \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}% 370 % 371 {% 372 % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files. 373 % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to 374 % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends 375 % before the \shipout runs. 376 % 377 \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. 378 \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if 379 % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. 380 % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this: 381 % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}} 382 % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in; 383 % it needs to be 384 % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym} 385 \shipout\vbox{% 386 % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page. 387 \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi 388 % 389 \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup 390 \hsize = \outerhsize 391 \vskip-\topandbottommargin 392 \vtop to0pt{% 393 \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% 394 \nointerlineskip 395 \line{% 396 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% 397 \hfill 398 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% 399 }% 400 \vss}% 401 \vskip\topandbottommargin 402 \line\bgroup 403 \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. 404 \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi 405 \vbox\bgroup 406 \fi 407 % 408 \unvbox\headlinebox 409 \pagebody{#1}% 410 \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt 411 % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. 412 % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.) 413 % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. 414 \vskip 24pt 415 \unvbox\footlinebox 416 \fi 417 % 418 \ifcropmarks 419 \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup 420 \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup 421 \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill 422 \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick 423 \vbox to0pt{\vss 424 \line{% 425 \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% 426 \hfill 427 \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% 428 }% 429 \nointerlineskip 430 \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% 431 }% 432 \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause 433 \fi 434 }% end of \shipout\vbox 435 }% end of group with \indexdummies 436 \advancepageno 437 \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi 438} 439 440\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen 441 442% Main part of page, including any footnotes 443\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}} 444{\catcode`\@ =11 445\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi 446% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala) 447\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present 448 \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi 449\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax 450\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi 451\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} 452} 453 454% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are 455% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize 456% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) 457% 458\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong} 459\def\nstop{\vbox 460 {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}} 461\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong} 462\def\nsbot{\vbox 463 {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}} 464 465 466% Argument parsing 467 468% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of 469% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a 470% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument. 471% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}. 472% 473\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}} 474\def\parseargusing#1#2{% 475 \def\argtorun{#2}% 476 \begingroup 477 \obeylines 478 \spaceisspace 479 #1% 480 \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below. 481} 482 483{\obeylines % 484 \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{% 485 \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg. 486 \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm% 487 }% 488} 489 490% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment. Also remove a @texinfoc 491% comment (see \scanmacro for details). Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces. 492\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm} 493\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm} 494\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm} 495 496% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space. 497% 498% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g., 499% @end itemize @c foo 500% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed 501% by \finishparsearg. 502% 503\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M} 504\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M} 505\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{% 506 \def\temp{#3}% 507 \ifx\temp\empty 508 % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp: 509 \let\temp\finishparsearg 510 \else 511 \let\temp\argcheckspaces 512 \fi 513 % Put the space token in: 514 \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm 515} 516 517% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so 518% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation. 519% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now, 520% just before passing the control to \argtorun. 521% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is 522% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger 523% that a pair of braces would be stripped. 524% 525% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token. 526% 527\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}} 528 529 530% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line 531% 532% \parseargdef\foo{...} 533% is roughly equivalent to 534% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo} 535% \def\Xfoo#1{...} 536\def\parseargdef#1{% 537 \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1% 538} 539\def\doparseargdef#1#2{% 540 \def#2{\parsearg#1}% 541 \def#1##1% 542} 543 544% Several utility definitions with active space: 545{ 546 \obeyspaces 547 \gdef\obeyedspace{ } 548 549 % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword 550 % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this 551 % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input 552 % should produce a line of output anyway. 553 % 554 \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie} 555 556 % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces 557 % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the 558 % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). 559 \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space} 560} 561 562 563\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next} 564 565% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this: 566% 567% \envdef\foo{...} 568% \def\Efoo{...} 569% 570% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the 571% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also 572% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks 573% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be 574% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected. 575% 576% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they 577% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The 578% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this 579% special case.) 580 581 582% At run-time, environments start with this: 583\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}} 584% initialize 585\let\thisenv\empty 586 587% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'': 588\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 589\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}} 590 591% Check whether we're in the right environment: 592\def\checkenv#1{% 593 \def\temp{#1}% 594 \ifx\thisenv\temp 595 \else 596 \badenverr 597 \fi 598} 599 600% Environment mismatch, #1 expected: 601\def\badenverr{% 602 \errhelp = \EMsimple 603 \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp, 604 not \inenvironment\thisenv}% 605} 606\def\inenvironment#1{% 607 \ifx#1\empty 608 outside of any environment% 609 \else 610 in environment \expandafter\string#1% 611 \fi 612} 613 614% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo. 615% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv 616% 617\parseargdef\end{% 618 \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname 619 \else 620 % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal. 621 \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname 622 \csname E#1\endcsname 623 \endgroup 624 \fi 625} 626 627\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} 628 629 630% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space 631% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space 632% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and 633% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the 634% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. 635{\catcode`@ = 11 636 % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble 637 % if the definition is written into an index file. 638 \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M 639 \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } 640} 641 642% @: forces normal size whitespace following. 643\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } 644 645% @* forces a line break. 646\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces} 647 648% @/ allows a line break. 649\let\/=\allowbreak 650 651% @. is an end-of-sentence period. 652\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 653 654% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. 655\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 656 657% @? is an end-of-sentence query. 658\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space} 659 660% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation. 661% 662\def\onword{on} 663\def\offword{off} 664% 665\parseargdef\frenchspacing{% 666 \def\temp{#1}% 667 \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing 668 \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing 669 \else 670 \errhelp = \EMsimple 671 \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}% 672 \fi\fi 673} 674 675% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the 676% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would 677% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph. 678\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}} 679 680% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing 681% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box 682% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for 683% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is 684% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large, 685% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and 686% the text is small, which looks bad. 687% 688% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can 689% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it 690% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an 691% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The 692% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit 693% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex). 694% 695\newbox\groupbox 696\def\vfilllimit{0.7} 697% 698\envdef\group{% 699 \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else 700 \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp 701 \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}% 702 \fi 703 \startsavinginserts 704 % 705 \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup 706 % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as 707 % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an 708 % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after 709 % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group 710 % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo 711 % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text. 712 \comment 713} 714% 715% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts 716% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done) 717% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space 718% above. But it's pretty close. 719\def\Egroup{% 720 % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group 721 % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth. 722 \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar. 723 \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth 724 \egroup % End the \vtop. 725 \addgroupbox 726 \prevdepth = \dimen1 727 \checkinserts 728} 729 730\def\addgroupbox{ 731 % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box. 732 \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox 733 % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less). 734 \dimen2 = \txipageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal 735 % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big 736 % group, force a page break. 737 \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2 738 \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight 739 \page 740 \fi 741 \fi 742 \box\groupbox 743} 744 745% 746% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help 747% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'. 748% 749\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{% 750group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J% 751where each line of input produces a line of output.} 752 753% @need space-in-mils 754% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining. 755 756\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in 757 758\parseargdef\need{% 759 % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a 760 % paragraph. 761 \par 762 % 763 % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless. 764 \dimen0 = #1\mil 765 \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox 766 \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox 767 \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2 768 % 769 % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the 770 % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line. 771 % And a page break here is fine. 772 \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}% 773 % 774 % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the 775 % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the 776 % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider 777 % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the 778 % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999. 779 % 780 % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the 781 % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in 782 % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which 783 % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing 784 % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an 785 % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real 786 % document, then we can reconsider our strategy. 787 \penalty9999 788 % 789 % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not. 790 \kern -#1\mil 791 % 792 % Do not allow a page break right after this kern. 793 \nobreak 794 \fi 795} 796 797% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented). 798 799\let\br = \par 800 801% @page forces the start of a new page. 802% 803\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} 804 805% @exdent text.... 806% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin 807 808% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment. 809% That's how much \exdent should take out. 810\newskip\exdentamount 811 812% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun. 813\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break} 814 815% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example. 816\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount 817 \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} 818 819% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current 820% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion 821% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'. Not documented, written for gawk manual. 822% 823\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm 824\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} 825% 826\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{% 827 \nobreak 828 \kern-\strutdepth 829 \vtop to \strutdepth{% 830 \baselineskip=\strutdepth 831 \vss 832 % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to 833 % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size. 834 \ifx#1l% 835 \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}% 836 \else 837 \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}% 838 \fi 839 \null 840 }% 841}} 842\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l} 843\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r} 844% 845% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]} 846% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right; 847% else use TEXT for both). 848% 849\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish} 850\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing. 851 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 852 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 853 \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts 854 \def\righttext{#2}% 855 \else 856 \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text 857 \def\righttext{#1}% 858 \fi 859 % 860 \ifodd\pageno 861 \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin 862 \else 863 \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}% 864 \fi 865 \temp 866} 867 868% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE. 869% 870\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz} 871\def\includezzz#1{% 872 \pushthisfilestack 873 \def\thisfile{#1}% 874 {% 875 \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE. 876 \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion 877 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 878 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}% 879 \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }% 880 % 881 % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes 882 % definitions, etc. 883 \expandafter 884 }\temp 885 \popthisfilestack 886} 887\def\filenamecatcodes{% 888 \catcode`\\=\other 889 \catcode`~=\other 890 \catcode`^=\other 891 \catcode`_=\other 892 \catcode`|=\other 893 \catcode`<=\other 894 \catcode`>=\other 895 \catcode`+=\other 896 \catcode`-=\other 897 \catcode`\`=\other 898 \catcode`\'=\other 899} 900 901\def\pushthisfilestack{% 902 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm 903} 904\def\pushthisfilestackX{% 905 \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm 906} 907\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {% 908 \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}% 909} 910 911\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty} 912\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error: 913 the stack of filenames is empty.}} 914% 915\def\thisfile{} 916 917% @center line 918% outputs that line, centered. 919% 920\parseargdef\center{% 921 \ifhmode 922 \let\centersub\centerH 923 \else 924 \let\centersub\centerV 925 \fi 926 \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}% 927 \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case 928} 929\def\centerH#1{{% 930 \hfil\break 931 \advance\hsize by -\leftskip 932 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 933 \line{#1}% 934 \break 935}} 936% 937\newcount\centerpenalty 938\def\centerV#1{% 939 % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if 940 % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe 941 % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still 942 % prevent a page break here. 943 \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty 944 \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi 945 \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi 946 \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}% 947} 948 949% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space 950% 951\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip} 952 953% @comment ...line which is ignored... 954% @c is the same as @comment 955% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment 956 957 958\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active% 959\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% 960\cxxx} 961{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} 962% 963\let\comment\c 964 965% @paragraphindent NCHARS 966% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough. 967% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'. 968% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though. 969% 970\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords 971\def\noneword{none} 972% 973\parseargdef\paragraphindent{% 974 \def\temp{#1}% 975 \ifx\temp\asisword 976 \else 977 \ifx\temp\noneword 978 \defaultparindent = 0pt 979 \else 980 \defaultparindent = #1em 981 \fi 982 \fi 983 \parindent = \defaultparindent 984} 985 986% @exampleindent NCHARS 987% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent. 988% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but 989% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent. 990\parseargdef\exampleindent{% 991 \def\temp{#1}% 992 \ifx\temp\asisword 993 \else 994 \ifx\temp\noneword 995 \lispnarrowing = 0pt 996 \else 997 \lispnarrowing = #1em 998 \fi 999 \fi 1000} 1001 1002% @firstparagraphindent WORD 1003% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph 1004% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such 1005% paragraphs. 1006% 1007% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling 1008% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do. 1009% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD. 1010% By default, we suppress indentation. 1011% 1012\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent} 1013\def\insertword{insert} 1014% 1015\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{% 1016 \def\temp{#1}% 1017 \ifx\temp\noneword 1018 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent 1019 \else\ifx\temp\insertword 1020 \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax 1021 \else 1022 \errhelp = \EMsimple 1023 \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}% 1024 \fi\fi 1025} 1026 1027% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to 1028% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty. 1029% 1030% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next 1031% paragraph. 1032% 1033\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{% 1034 \gdef\indent {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}% 1035 \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}% 1036 \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}% 1037} 1038% 1039\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{% 1040 \global\let\indent = \ptexindent 1041 \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent 1042 \global\everypar = {}% 1043} 1044 1045 1046% @refill is a no-op. 1047\let\refill=\relax 1048 1049% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored 1050\let\setfilename=\comment 1051 1052% @bye. 1053\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} 1054 1055 1056\message{pdf,} 1057% adobe `portable' document format 1058\newcount\tempnum 1059\newcount\lnkcount 1060\newtoks\filename 1061\newcount\filenamelength 1062\newcount\pgn 1063\newtoks\toksA 1064\newtoks\toksB 1065\newtoks\toksC 1066\newtoks\toksD 1067\newbox\boxA 1068\newbox\boxB 1069\newcount\countA 1070\newif\ifpdf 1071\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest 1072 1073% 1074% For LuaTeX 1075% 1076 1077\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname 1078\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc. 1079 1080\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1081\else 1082 % Use Unicode destination names 1083 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1084 % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8 1085 \begingroup 1086 \catcode`\%=12 1087 \directlua{ 1088 function UTF16oct(str) 1089 tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377') 1090 for c in string.utfvalues(str) do 1091 if c < 0x10000 then 1092 tex.sprint( 1093 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1094 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1095 (c / 256), (c % 256))) 1096 else 1097 c = c - 0x10000 1098 local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800 1099 local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00 1100 tex.sprint( 1101 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1102 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1103 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' .. 1104 string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1105 (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256), 1106 (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256))) 1107 end 1108 end 1109 end 1110 } 1111 \endgroup 1112 \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1113 % Escape PDF strings without converting 1114 \begingroup 1115 \directlua{ 1116 function PDFescstr(str) 1117 for c in string.bytes(str) do 1118 if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then 1119 tex.sprint( 1120 string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o', 1121 c)) 1122 else 1123 tex.sprint(string.char(c)) 1124 end 1125 end 1126 end 1127 } 1128 \endgroup 1129 \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}} 1130 \ifnum\luatexversion>84 1131 % For LuaTeX >= 0.85 1132 \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest} 1133 \let\pdfoutput\outputmode 1134 \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal} 1135 \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog} 1136 \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax} 1137 \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource 1138 \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource 1139 \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex 1140 \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax} 1141 \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline} 1142 \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink} 1143 \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr} 1144 \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj} 1145 \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax} 1146 \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth 1147 \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight 1148 \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin} 1149 \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin} 1150 \fi 1151\fi 1152 1153% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1 1154% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined. 1155\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined 1156\else 1157 \ifx\pdfoutput\relax 1158 \else 1159 \ifcase\pdfoutput 1160 \else 1161 \pdftrue 1162 \fi 1163 \fi 1164\fi 1165 1166% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets, 1167% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to 1168% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be 1169% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good. 1170% 1171% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and 1172% related messages. The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user 1173% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so 1174% that's what we do. pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to 1175% do this reliably, so we use it. 1176 1177% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements, 1178% which we \xdef. 1179\def\txiescapepdf#1{% 1180 \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined 1181 % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log? 1182 % Many times it won't matter. 1183 \xdef#1{#1}% 1184 \else 1185 % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses, 1186 % backslashes, and other special chars. 1187 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}% 1188 \fi 1189} 1190\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{% 1191 \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined 1192 % No UTF-16 converting macro available. 1193 \txiescapepdf{#1}% 1194 \else 1195 \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}% 1196 \fi 1197} 1198 1199\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images 1200with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot 1201be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI 1202output) for that.)} 1203 1204\ifpdf 1205 % 1206 % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex, 1207 % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a 1208 % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead 1209 % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as 1210 % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing. We use 1211 % black by default, though. 1212 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1213 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1214 % 1215 % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.); 1216 % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s). 1217 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg #1 RG}} 1218 % 1219 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1220 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1221 \def\setcolor#1{% 1222 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1223 \domark 1224 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1225 } 1226 % 1227 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1228 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1229 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1230 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1231 % 1232 \def\makefootline{% 1233 \baselineskip24pt 1234 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1235 } 1236 % 1237 \def\makeheadline{% 1238 \vbox to 0pt{% 1239 \vskip-22.5pt 1240 \line{% 1241 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1242 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1243 \getcolormarks 1244 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1245 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1246 }% 1247 \vss 1248 }% 1249 \nointerlineskip 1250 } 1251 % 1252 % 1253 \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines} 1254 % 1255 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1256 \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{% 1257 \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1258 \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1259 % 1260 % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1261 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1262 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1263 % bitmap. 1264 \let\pdfimgext=\empty 1265 \begingroup 1266 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1267 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1268 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1269 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1270 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1271 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1272 \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp 1273 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}% 1274 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}% 1275 \fi 1276 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}% 1277 \fi 1278 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}% 1279 \fi 1280 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}% 1281 \fi 1282 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}% 1283 \fi 1284 \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}% 1285 \fi 1286 \closein 1 1287 \endgroup 1288 % 1289 % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is 1290 % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.) 1291 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1292 \immediate\pdfimage 1293 \else 1294 \immediate\pdfximage 1295 \fi 1296 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi 1297 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi 1298 \ifnum\pdftexversion<13 1299 #1.\pdfimgext 1300 \else 1301 {#1.\pdfimgext}% 1302 \fi 1303 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else 1304 \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage 1305 \fi} 1306 % 1307 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1308 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1309 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1310 \indexnofonts 1311 \makevalueexpandable 1312 \turnoffactive 1313 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1314 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1315 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1316 % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode. 1317 \else 1318 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1319 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1320 \else 1321 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1322 \passthroughcharsfalse 1323 \fi 1324 \fi 1325 \else 1326 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1327 \passthroughcharsfalse 1328 \fi 1329 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1330 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1331 }} 1332 % 1333 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1334 \indexnofonts 1335 \makevalueexpandable 1336 \turnoffactive 1337 \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 1338 % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark 1339 % strings. See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for 1340 % the "PDFDocEncoding". 1341 \passthroughcharstrue 1342 % Pass through Latin-1 characters. 1343 % LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode 1344 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1345 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1346 \else 1347 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 1348 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 1349 % For pdfTeX with UTF-8. 1350 % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings, 1351 % but the code for this isn't done yet. 1352 % Use ASCII approximations. 1353 \passthroughcharsfalse 1354 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1355 \else 1356 % For LuaTeX with UTF-8. 1357 % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts. 1358 \passthroughcharstrue 1359 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1360 \fi 1361 \else 1362 % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings. 1363 % Use ASCII approximations. 1364 \passthroughcharsfalse 1365 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1366 \fi 1367 \fi 1368 % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16 1369 % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding 1370 \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext 1371 }} 1372 % 1373 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1374 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1375 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1376 } 1377 % 1378 % used to mark target names; must be expandable. 1379 \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1} 1380 % 1381 % by default, use black for everything. 1382 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1383 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1384 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1385 % 1386 % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines 1387 % come from Petr Olsak 1388 \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0% 1389 \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi} 1390 \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax 1391 \advance\tempnum by 1 1392 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}} 1393 % 1394 % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the 1395 % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number 1396 % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text, 1397 % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node. 1398 % #4 is the page number 1399 % 1400 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1401 % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the 1402 % page number. We could generate a destination for the section 1403 % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't 1404 % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured. 1405 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1406 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1407 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1408 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1409 \fi 1410 % 1411 \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}% 1412 } 1413 % 1414 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1415 \begingroup 1416 % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline. 1417 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1418 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1419 \def\thischapnum{##2}% 1420 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1421 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1422 }% 1423 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1424 \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}% 1425 \def\thissecnum{##2}% 1426 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1427 }% 1428 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1429 \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}% 1430 \def\thissubsecnum{##2}% 1431 }% 1432 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1433 \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}% 1434 }% 1435 \def\thischapnum{0}% 1436 \def\thissecnum{0}% 1437 \def\thissubsecnum{0}% 1438 % 1439 % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et 1440 % al. a second time, below. 1441 \def\appentry{\numchapentry}% 1442 \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1443 \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1444 \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1445 \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}% 1446 \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}% 1447 \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}% 1448 \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}% 1449 \readdatafile{toc}% 1450 % 1451 % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines. 1452 % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of 1453 % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above. 1454 % 1455 % We use the node names as the destinations. 1456 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1457 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1458 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1459 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1460 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1461 \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}% 1462 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero 1463 \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}% 1464 % 1465 % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of 1466 % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters, 1467 % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from 1468 % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from 1469 % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100. 1470 % 1471 % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to 1472 % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Too 1473 % much work for too little return. Just use the ASCII equivalents 1474 % we use for the index sort strings. 1475 % 1476 \indexnofonts 1477 \setupdatafile 1478 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1479 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1480 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1481 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1482 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1483 \input \tocreadfilename 1484 \endgroup 1485 } 1486 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1487 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1488 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1489 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1490 ] 1491 % 1492 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1493 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1494 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1495 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1496 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1497 \fi 1498 \nextsp} 1499 \def\getfilename#1{% 1500 \filenamelength=0 1501 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1502 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1503 \edef\temp{#1}% 1504 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1505 } 1506 \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 1507 \let \startlink \pdfannotlink 1508 \else 1509 \let \startlink \pdfstartlink 1510 \fi 1511 % make a live url in pdf output. 1512 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1513 \begingroup 1514 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1515 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1516 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1517 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1518 % 1519 \normalturnoffactive 1520 \def\@{@}% 1521 \let\/=\empty 1522 \makevalueexpandable 1523 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1524 % special-casing \var here? 1525 \def\var##1{##1}% 1526 % 1527 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1528 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 1529 user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}% 1530 \endgroup} 1531 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1532 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1533 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1534 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1535 \def\maketoks{% 1536 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1537 \ifx\first0\adn0 1538 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1539 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1540 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1541 \else 1542 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1543 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1544 \let\next=\maketoks 1545 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1546 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1547 \fi 1548 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1549 \next} 1550 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1551 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1552 \def\pdflink#1{% 1553 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}} 1554 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1555 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1556\else 1557 % non-pdf mode 1558 \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble 1559 \let\pdfurl = \gobble 1560 \let\endlink = \relax 1561 \let\setcolor = \gobble 1562 \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble 1563 \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax 1564\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput 1565 1566% 1567% For XeTeX 1568% 1569\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 1570\else 1571 % 1572 % XeTeX version check 1573 % 1574 \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1 1575 % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307. 1576 % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941). 1577 % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special 1578 % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 1579 \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010} 1580 % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+. 1581 % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF. 1582 \txiuseunicodedestnametrue 1583 \else 1584 % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the 1585 % `dvipdfmx:config' special. 1586 % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement, 1587 % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary. 1588 % 1589 % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF 1590 % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue. 1591 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1592 \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse 1593 \fi 1594 % 1595 % Color support 1596 % 1597 \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12} 1598 \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0} 1599 % 1600 \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}} 1601 % 1602 % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly, 1603 % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore. 1604 \def\setcolor#1{% 1605 \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}% 1606 \domark 1607 \pdfsetcolor{#1}% 1608 } 1609 % 1610 \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack} 1611 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor} 1612 \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor} 1613 \def\lastcolordefs{} 1614 % 1615 \def\makefootline{% 1616 \baselineskip24pt 1617 \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}% 1618 } 1619 % 1620 \def\makeheadline{% 1621 \vbox to 0pt{% 1622 \vskip-22.5pt 1623 \line{% 1624 \vbox to8.5pt{}% 1625 % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks. 1626 \getcolormarks 1627 % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color. 1628 \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}% 1629 }% 1630 \vss 1631 }% 1632 \nointerlineskip 1633 } 1634 % 1635 % PDF outline support 1636 % 1637 % Emulate pdfTeX primitive 1638 \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{% 1639 \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}% 1640 } 1641 % 1642 \def\setpdfdestname#1{{% 1643 % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters 1644 % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title. 1645 \indexnofonts 1646 \makevalueexpandable 1647 \turnoffactive 1648 \iftxiuseunicodedestname 1649 % Pass through Unicode characters. 1650 \else 1651 % Use ASCII approximations in destination names. 1652 \passthroughcharsfalse 1653 \fi 1654 \def\pdfdestname{#1}% 1655 \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname 1656 }} 1657 % 1658 \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{% 1659 \turnoffactive 1660 % Always use Unicode characters in title texts. 1661 \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}% 1662 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16. 1663 % So we do not convert. 1664 \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext 1665 }} 1666 % 1667 \def\pdfmkdest#1{% 1668 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 1669 \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}% 1670 } 1671 % 1672 % by default, use black for everything. 1673 \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack} 1674 \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack} 1675 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink} 1676 % 1677 \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{% 1678 \setpdfoutlinetext{#1} 1679 \setpdfdestname{#3} 1680 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 1681 \def\pdfdestname{#4}% 1682 \fi 1683 % 1684 \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A 1685 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }% 1686 } 1687 % 1688 \def\pdfmakeoutlines{% 1689 \begingroup 1690 % 1691 % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary. 1692 % Therefore, we read toc only once. 1693 % 1694 % We use node names as destinations. 1695 \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines 1696 \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{% 1697 \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}% 1698 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1699 \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}% 1700 \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1701 \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}% 1702 \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% 1703 \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}% 1704 % 1705 \let\appentry\numchapentry% 1706 \let\appsecentry\numsecentry% 1707 \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1708 \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1709 \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry% 1710 \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry% 1711 \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry% 1712 \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry% 1713 % 1714 % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16. 1715 % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered. 1716 % 1717 \indexnofonts 1718 \setupdatafile 1719 % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike 1720 % Texinfo index files. So set that up. 1721 \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}% 1722 \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}% 1723 \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash 1724 \input \tocreadfilename 1725 \endgroup 1726 } 1727 {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2 1728 \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other 1729 \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]% 1730 \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]% 1731 ] 1732 1733 \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> } 1734 % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary 1735 % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it. 1736 % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315, 1737 % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings. 1738 % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753). 1739% 1740 \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}% 1741 \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax 1742 \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces 1743 \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}% 1744 \advance\filenamelength by 1 1745 \fi 1746 \nextsp} 1747 \def\getfilename#1{% 1748 \filenamelength=0 1749 % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get 1750 % snagged on things like "@value{foo}". 1751 \edef\temp{#1}% 1752 \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax 1753 } 1754 % make a live url in pdf output. 1755 \def\pdfurl#1{% 1756 \begingroup 1757 % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not 1758 % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context 1759 % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one 1760 % people have actually reported a problem with. 1761 % 1762 \normalturnoffactive 1763 \def\@{@}% 1764 \let\/=\empty 1765 \makevalueexpandable 1766 % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just 1767 % special-casing \var here? 1768 \def\var##1{##1}% 1769 % 1770 \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}% 1771 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1772 /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}% 1773 \endgroup} 1774 \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}} 1775 \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}} 1776 \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks} 1777 \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks} 1778 \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}} 1779 \def\maketoks{% 1780 \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax 1781 \ifx\first0\adn0 1782 \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3 1783 \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6 1784 \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9 1785 \else 1786 \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi 1787 \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else 1788 \let\next=\maketoks 1789 \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD} 1790 \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi 1791 \fi 1792 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 1793 \next} 1794 \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}% 1795 {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0} 1796 \def\pdflink#1{% 1797 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] 1798 /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}% 1799 \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink} 1800 \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st} 1801% 1802 % 1803 % @image support 1804 % 1805 % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto). 1806 \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{% 1807 \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 1808 \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 1809 % 1810 % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among 1811 % others). Let's try in that order, PDF first since if 1812 % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a 1813 % bitmap. 1814 \let\xeteximgext=\empty 1815 \begingroup 1816 \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1 1817 \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1 1818 \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1 1819 \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1 1820 \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1 1821 \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1 1822 \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}% 1823 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}% 1824 \fi 1825 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}% 1826 \fi 1827 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}% 1828 \fi 1829 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}% 1830 \fi 1831 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}% 1832 \fi 1833 \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}% 1834 \fi 1835 \closein 1 1836 \endgroup 1837 % 1838 \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}% 1839 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1840 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1841 \else 1842 \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}% 1843 \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext 1844 \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1845 \else 1846 \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext "" 1847 \fi 1848 \fi 1849 \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi 1850 \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax 1851 } 1852\fi 1853 1854 1855% 1856\message{fonts,} 1857 1858% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size 1859% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers 1860% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined. 1861% 1862\def\lineskipfactor{.08333} 1863\def\strutheightpercent{.70833} 1864\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167} 1865% 1866% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this. 1867\def\baselinefactor{1} 1868% 1869\newdimen\textleading 1870\def\setleading#1{% 1871 \dimen0 = #1\relax 1872 \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0 1873 \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip 1874 \normalbaselines 1875 \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{% 1876 \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip 1877 depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip 1878 }% 1879} 1880 1881% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap. 1882% 1883% do nothing with this by default. 1884\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble 1885\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble 1886\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble 1887 1888% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps. 1889% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run 1890% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.) 1891\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else 1892 \begingroup 1893 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1894 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1895%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1896%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1897%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0) 1898%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0) 1899%%Version: 1.000 1900%%EndComments 1901/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 190212 dict begin 1903begincmap 1904/CIDSystemInfo 1905<< /Registry (TeX) 1906/Ordering (OT1) 1907/Supplement 0 1908>> def 1909/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def 1910/CMapType 2 def 19111 begincodespacerange 1912<00> <7F> 1913endcodespacerange 19148 beginbfrange 1915<00> <01> <0393> 1916<09> <0A> <03A8> 1917<23> <26> <0023> 1918<28> <3B> <0028> 1919<3F> <5B> <003F> 1920<5D> <5E> <005D> 1921<61> <7A> <0061> 1922<7B> <7C> <2013> 1923endbfrange 192440 beginbfchar 1925<02> <0398> 1926<03> <039B> 1927<04> <039E> 1928<05> <03A0> 1929<06> <03A3> 1930<07> <03D2> 1931<08> <03A6> 1932<0B> <00660066> 1933<0C> <00660069> 1934<0D> <0066006C> 1935<0E> <006600660069> 1936<0F> <00660066006C> 1937<10> <0131> 1938<11> <0237> 1939<12> <0060> 1940<13> <00B4> 1941<14> <02C7> 1942<15> <02D8> 1943<16> <00AF> 1944<17> <02DA> 1945<18> <00B8> 1946<19> <00DF> 1947<1A> <00E6> 1948<1B> <0153> 1949<1C> <00F8> 1950<1D> <00C6> 1951<1E> <0152> 1952<1F> <00D8> 1953<21> <0021> 1954<22> <201D> 1955<27> <2019> 1956<3C> <00A1> 1957<3D> <003D> 1958<3E> <00BF> 1959<5C> <201C> 1960<5F> <02D9> 1961<60> <2018> 1962<7D> <02DD> 1963<7E> <007E> 1964<7F> <00A8> 1965endbfchar 1966endcmap 1967CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 1968end 1969end 1970%%EndResource 1971%%EOF 1972 }\endgroup 1973 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{% 1974 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 1975 }% 1976% 1977% \cmapOT1IT 1978 \begingroup 1979 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 1980 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 1981%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1982%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 1983%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0) 1984%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0) 1985%%Version: 1.000 1986%%EndComments 1987/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 198812 dict begin 1989begincmap 1990/CIDSystemInfo 1991<< /Registry (TeX) 1992/Ordering (OT1IT) 1993/Supplement 0 1994>> def 1995/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def 1996/CMapType 2 def 19971 begincodespacerange 1998<00> <7F> 1999endcodespacerange 20008 beginbfrange 2001<00> <01> <0393> 2002<09> <0A> <03A8> 2003<25> <26> <0025> 2004<28> <3B> <0028> 2005<3F> <5B> <003F> 2006<5D> <5E> <005D> 2007<61> <7A> <0061> 2008<7B> <7C> <2013> 2009endbfrange 201042 beginbfchar 2011<02> <0398> 2012<03> <039B> 2013<04> <039E> 2014<05> <03A0> 2015<06> <03A3> 2016<07> <03D2> 2017<08> <03A6> 2018<0B> <00660066> 2019<0C> <00660069> 2020<0D> <0066006C> 2021<0E> <006600660069> 2022<0F> <00660066006C> 2023<10> <0131> 2024<11> <0237> 2025<12> <0060> 2026<13> <00B4> 2027<14> <02C7> 2028<15> <02D8> 2029<16> <00AF> 2030<17> <02DA> 2031<18> <00B8> 2032<19> <00DF> 2033<1A> <00E6> 2034<1B> <0153> 2035<1C> <00F8> 2036<1D> <00C6> 2037<1E> <0152> 2038<1F> <00D8> 2039<21> <0021> 2040<22> <201D> 2041<23> <0023> 2042<24> <00A3> 2043<27> <2019> 2044<3C> <00A1> 2045<3D> <003D> 2046<3E> <00BF> 2047<5C> <201C> 2048<5F> <02D9> 2049<60> <2018> 2050<7D> <02DD> 2051<7E> <007E> 2052<7F> <00A8> 2053endbfchar 2054endcmap 2055CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2056end 2057end 2058%%EndResource 2059%%EOF 2060 }\endgroup 2061 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{% 2062 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2063 }% 2064% 2065% \cmapOT1TT 2066 \begingroup 2067 \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char. 2068 \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap 2069%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2070%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit) 2071%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0) 2072%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0) 2073%%Version: 1.000 2074%%EndComments 2075/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin 207612 dict begin 2077begincmap 2078/CIDSystemInfo 2079<< /Registry (TeX) 2080/Ordering (OT1TT) 2081/Supplement 0 2082>> def 2083/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def 2084/CMapType 2 def 20851 begincodespacerange 2086<00> <7F> 2087endcodespacerange 20885 beginbfrange 2089<00> <01> <0393> 2090<09> <0A> <03A8> 2091<21> <26> <0021> 2092<28> <5F> <0028> 2093<61> <7E> <0061> 2094endbfrange 209532 beginbfchar 2096<02> <0398> 2097<03> <039B> 2098<04> <039E> 2099<05> <03A0> 2100<06> <03A3> 2101<07> <03D2> 2102<08> <03A6> 2103<0B> <2191> 2104<0C> <2193> 2105<0D> <0027> 2106<0E> <00A1> 2107<0F> <00BF> 2108<10> <0131> 2109<11> <0237> 2110<12> <0060> 2111<13> <00B4> 2112<14> <02C7> 2113<15> <02D8> 2114<16> <00AF> 2115<17> <02DA> 2116<18> <00B8> 2117<19> <00DF> 2118<1A> <00E6> 2119<1B> <0153> 2120<1C> <00F8> 2121<1D> <00C6> 2122<1E> <0152> 2123<1F> <00D8> 2124<20> <2423> 2125<27> <2019> 2126<60> <2018> 2127<7F> <00A8> 2128endbfchar 2129endcmap 2130CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop 2131end 2132end 2133%%EndResource 2134%%EOF 2135 }\endgroup 2136 \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{% 2137 \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}% 2138 }% 2139\fi\fi 2140 2141 2142% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2. 2143% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap 2144% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit). 2145% Example: 2146% #1 = \textrm 2147% #2 = \rmshape 2148% #3 = 10 2149% #4 = \mainmagstep 2150% #5 = OT1 2151% 2152\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{% 2153 \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4 2154 \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1% 2155} 2156% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty. 2157\let\cmap\gobble 2158% 2159% (end of cmaps) 2160 2161% Use cm as the default font prefix. 2162% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix 2163% before you read in texinfo.tex. 2164\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined 2165\def\fontprefix{cm} 2166\fi 2167% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. 2168\def\rmshape{r} 2169\def\rmbshape{bx} % where the normal face is bold 2170\def\bfshape{b} 2171\def\bxshape{bx} 2172\def\ttshape{tt} 2173\def\ttbshape{tt} 2174\def\ttslshape{sltt} 2175\def\itshape{ti} 2176\def\itbshape{bxti} 2177\def\slshape{sl} 2178\def\slbshape{bxsl} 2179\def\sfshape{ss} 2180\def\sfbshape{ss} 2181\def\scshape{csc} 2182\def\scbshape{csc} 2183 2184% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. (The default in Texinfo.) 2185% 2186\def\definetextfontsizexi{% 2187% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1). 2188\def\textnominalsize{11pt} 2189\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf} 2190\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2191\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2192\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2193\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2194\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2195\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2196\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2197\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2198\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2199\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2200\def\textecsize{1095} 2201 2202% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2203\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2204\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2205\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2206\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2207\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2208\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf} 2209 2210% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2211\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2212\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2213\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2214\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2215\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2216\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2217\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2218\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2219\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2220\font\smalli=cmmi9 2221\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2222\def\smallecsize{0900} 2223 2224% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2225\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2226\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2227\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2228\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2229\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2230\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2231\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2232\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2233\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2234\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2235\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2236\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2237 2238% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2239\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2240\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2241\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2242\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2243\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2244\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2245\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2246\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2247\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2248\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2249\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2250\def\titleecsize{2074} 2251 2252% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). 2253\def\chapnominalsize{17pt} 2254\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2255\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT} 2256\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2257\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2258\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2259\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1} 2260\let\chapbf=\chaprm 2261\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2262\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 2263\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 2264\def\chapecsize{1728} 2265 2266% Section fonts (14.4pt). 2267\def\secnominalsize{14pt} 2268\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2269\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2270\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2271\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2272\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2273\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2274\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2275\let\secbf\secrm 2276\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2277\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2278\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2279\def\sececsize{1440} 2280 2281% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). 2282\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt} 2283\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2284\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT} 2285\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2286\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2287\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT} 2288\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2289\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2290\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1} 2291\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf 2292\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 2293\def\ssececsize{1200} 2294 2295% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt). 2296\def\reducednominalsize{10pt} 2297\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2298\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2299\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2300\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2301\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2302\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2303\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2304\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2305\font\reducedi=cmmi10 2306\font\reducedsy=cmsy10 2307\def\reducedecsize{1000} 2308 2309\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM 2310\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2311\rm 2312} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi 2313 2314 2315% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with 2316% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU 2317% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the 2318% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt. 2319% 2320\def\definetextfontsizex{% 2321% Text fonts (10pt). 2322\def\textnominalsize{10pt} 2323\edef\mainmagstep{1000} 2324\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2325\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2326\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2327\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT} 2328\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2329\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2330\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1} 2331\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT} 2332\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep 2333\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep 2334\def\textecsize{1000} 2335 2336% A few fonts for @defun names and args. 2337\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1} 2338\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2339\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2340\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT} 2341\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf 2342\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf} 2343 2344% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt). 2345\def\smallnominalsize{9pt} 2346\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2347\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2348\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2349\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2350\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2351\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2352\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2353\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2354\font\smalli=cmmi9 2355\font\smallsy=cmsy9 2356\def\smallecsize{0900} 2357 2358% Fonts for small examples (8pt). 2359\def\smallernominalsize{8pt} 2360\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2361\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT} 2362\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2363\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT} 2364\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2365\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 2366\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1} 2367\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT} 2368\font\smalleri=cmmi8 2369\font\smallersy=cmsy8 2370\def\smallerecsize{0800} 2371 2372% Fonts for title page (20.4pt): 2373\def\titlenominalsize{20pt} 2374\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1} 2375\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT} 2376\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2377\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT} 2378\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT} 2379\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2380\let\titlebf=\titlerm 2381\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1} 2382\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 2383\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 2384\def\titleecsize{2074} 2385 2386% Chapter fonts (14.4pt). 2387\def\chapnominalsize{14pt} 2388\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2389\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT} 2390\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2391\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2392\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT} 2393\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2394\let\chapbf\chaprm 2395\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1} 2396\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 2397\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 2398\def\chapecsize{1440} 2399 2400% Section fonts (12pt). 2401\def\secnominalsize{12pt} 2402\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2403\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT} 2404\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2405\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2406\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT} 2407\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2408\let\secbf\secrm 2409\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} 2410\font\seci=cmmi12 2411\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 2412\def\sececsize{1200} 2413 2414% Subsection fonts (10pt). 2415\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt} 2416\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2417\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT} 2418\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2419\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2420\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT} 2421\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2422\let\ssecbf\ssecrm 2423\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1} 2424\font\sseci=cmmi10 2425\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 2426\def\ssececsize{1000} 2427 2428% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt). 2429\def\reducednominalsize{9pt} 2430\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2431\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT} 2432\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2433\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT} 2434\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2435\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1} 2436\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1} 2437\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT} 2438\font\reducedi=cmmi9 2439\font\reducedsy=cmsy9 2440\def\reducedecsize{0900} 2441 2442\divide\parskip by 2 % reduce space between paragraphs 2443\textleading = 12pt % line spacing for 10pt CM 2444\textfonts % reset the current fonts 2445\rm 2446} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex 2447 2448% Fonts for short table of contents. 2449\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2450\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12 2451\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1} 2452\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT} 2453 2454 2455% We provide the user-level command 2456% @fonttextsize 10 2457% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed. 2458% 2459\def\xiword{11} 2460\def\xword{10} 2461\def\xwordpt{10pt} 2462% 2463\parseargdef\fonttextsize{% 2464 \def\textsizearg{#1}% 2465 %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}% 2466 % 2467 % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since 2468 % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless. 2469 % 2470 \begingroup \globaldefs=1 2471 \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex 2472 \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi 2473 \else 2474 \errhelp=\EMsimple 2475 \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'} 2476 \fi\fi 2477 \endgroup 2478} 2479 2480% 2481% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle. 2482% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in 2483% italics, not bold italics. 2484% 2485\def\setfontstyle#1{% 2486 \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd. 2487 \csname #1font\endcsname % change the current font 2488} 2489 2490\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}} 2491\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}} 2492\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}} 2493\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf} 2494\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}} 2495 2496% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. 2497% So we set up a \sf. 2498\newfam\sffam 2499\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}} 2500 2501% We don't need math for this font style. 2502\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}} 2503 2504 2505% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, 2506% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. We don't 2507% bother to reset \scriptfont and \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need. 2508% 2509\def\resetmathfonts{% 2510 \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont 2511 \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont 2512 \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont 2513} 2514 2515% 2516 2517% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings 2518% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs 2519% to also set the current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) 2520% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font. 2521% 2522% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower) 2523% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used 2524% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. 2525% 2526% This all needs generalizing, badly. 2527% 2528 2529\def\assignfonts#1{% 2530 \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname 2531 \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname 2532 \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname 2533 \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname 2534 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname 2535 \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname 2536 \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont \csname #1sf\endcsname 2537 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont \csname #1i\endcsname 2538 \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont \csname #1sy\endcsname 2539 \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname 2540} 2541 2542\newif\ifrmisbold 2543 2544% Select smaller font size with the current style. Used to change font size 2545% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms. If we are using bold fonts for 2546% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size. 2547\def\switchtolllsize{% 2548 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}% 2549 \ifrmisbold 2550 \let\rmfont\bffont 2551 \fi 2552 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2553}% 2554 2555\def\switchtolsize{% 2556 \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}% 2557 \ifrmisbold 2558 \let\rmfont\bffont 2559 \fi 2560 \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname 2561}% 2562 2563\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{% 2564\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{% 2565 \def\curfontsize{#1}% 2566 \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}% 2567 \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname 2568 \assignfonts{#1}% 2569 \resetmathfonts 2570 \setleading{#4}% 2571}} 2572 2573\definefontsetatsize{text} {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false} 2574\definefontsetatsize{title} {chap} {subsec} {27pt} {true} 2575\definefontsetatsize{chap} {sec} {text} {19pt} {true} 2576\definefontsetatsize{sec} {subsec} {reduced}{17pt} {true} 2577\definefontsetatsize{ssec} {text} {small} {15pt} {true} 2578\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small} {smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2579\definefontsetatsize{small} {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false} 2580\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false} 2581 2582\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} 2583\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2584\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts 2585 2586% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts. 2587\def\angleleft{$\langle$} 2588\def\angleright{$\rangle$} 2589 2590% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments. 2591\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts 2592 2593% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample 2594% can fit this many characters: 2595% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69 2596% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters: 2597% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77 2598% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth 2599% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt. 2600% 2601% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt): 2602% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58 2603% --karl, 24jan03. 2604 2605% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. 2606% 2607\definetextfontsizexi 2608 2609 2610\message{markup,} 2611 2612% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the 2613% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and 2614% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have 2615% this property, we can check that font parameter. 2616% 2617\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } 2618 2619% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will 2620% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes. 2621% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost 2622% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles 2623% currently in effect. 2624\newif\ifmarkupvar 2625\newif\ifmarkupsamp 2626\newif\ifmarkupkey 2627%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp. 2628%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp. 2629\newif\ifmarkupcode 2630\newif\ifmarkupkbd 2631%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code. 2632%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code. 2633\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now). 2634\newif\ifmarkupexample 2635\newif\ifmarkupverb 2636\newif\ifmarkupverbatim 2637 2638\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty 2639 2640\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{% 2641 \csname markup#1true\endcsname 2642 \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}% 2643 \markupstylesetup 2644} 2645 2646\let\markupstylesetup\empty 2647 2648\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{% 2649 \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup 2650 \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}% 2651 \def#1% 2652} 2653 2654% Markup style setup for left and right quotes. 2655\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{% 2656 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2657 \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2658 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi 2659} 2660 2661\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{% 2662 \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp 2663 \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname 2664 \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi 2665} 2666 2667{ 2668\catcode`\'=\active 2669\catcode`\`=\active 2670 2671\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq} 2672\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq} 2673 2674\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft} 2675\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright} 2676} 2677 2678\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft 2679\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright 2680% 2681\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft 2682\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright 2683% 2684\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetcodequoteleft 2685\let\markupsetuprqkbd \markupsetcodequoteright 2686% 2687\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft 2688\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright 2689% 2690\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft 2691\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright 2692% 2693\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft 2694\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright 2695 2696% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe 2697% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d). 2698% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it 2699% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the 2700% lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the regular 0x27. 2701% 2702\def\codequoteright{% 2703 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2704 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax 2705 '% 2706 \else \char'15 \fi 2707 \else \char'15 \fi 2708} 2709% 2710% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent. 2711% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like 2712% the code environments to do likewise. 2713% 2714\def\codequoteleft{% 2715 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2716 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax 2717 % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391 2718 % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2719 \relax`% 2720 \else \char'22 \fi 2721 \else \char'22 \fi 2722} 2723 2724% Commands to set the quote options. 2725% 2726\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{% 2727 \def\temp{#1}% 2728 \ifx\temp\onword 2729 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2730 = t% 2731 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2732 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname 2733 = \relax 2734 \else 2735 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2736 \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2737 \fi\fi 2738} 2739% 2740\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{% 2741 \def\temp{#1}% 2742 \ifx\temp\onword 2743 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2744 = t% 2745 \else\ifx\temp\offword 2746 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname 2747 = \relax 2748 \else 2749 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2750 \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}% 2751 \fi\fi 2752} 2753 2754% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font. 2755\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq} 2756 2757% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks 2758\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 2759 2760% Font commands. 2761 2762% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant. 2763% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl, 2764% and 2) do not add an italic correction. 2765\def\dosmartslant#1#2{% 2766 \ifusingtt 2767 {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}% 2768 {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}% 2769 \next 2770} 2771\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl} 2772\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it} 2773 2774% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following 2775% character) is such as not to need one. 2776\def\smartitaliccorrection{% 2777 \ifx\next,% 2778 \else\ifx\next-% 2779 \else\ifx\next.% 2780 \else\ifx\next\.% 2781 \else\ifx\next\comma% 2782 \else\ptexslash 2783 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 2784 \aftersmartic 2785} 2786 2787% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic. @var is set to this for defuns. 2788\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}} 2789 2790% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want 2791% ttsl for book titles, do we? 2792\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection} 2793 2794\def\aftersmartic{} 2795\def\var#1{% 2796 \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic 2797 \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}% 2798 \smartslanted{#1}% 2799} 2800 2801\let\i=\smartitalic 2802\let\slanted=\smartslanted 2803\let\dfn=\smartslanted 2804\let\emph=\smartitalic 2805 2806% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. 2807\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font 2808\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font 2809\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font 2810 2811% @b, explicit bold. Also @strong. 2812\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} 2813\let\strong=\b 2814 2815% @sansserif, explicit sans. 2816\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}} 2817 2818% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at 2819% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the 2820% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called. 2821% 2822\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation} 2823\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } 2824 2825% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value. 2826% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and 2827% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up. 2828% 2829\catcode`@=11 2830 \def\plainfrenchspacing{% 2831 \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m 2832 \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m 2833 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends 2834 } 2835 \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{% 2836 \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000 2837 \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250 2838 \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends 2839 } 2840\catcode`@=\other 2841\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default 2842 2843% @t, explicit typewriter. 2844\def\t#1{% 2845 {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}% 2846 \null 2847} 2848 2849% @samp. 2850\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}} 2851 2852% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes. 2853\let\indicateurl=\samp 2854 2855% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same 2856% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc. 2857% This is a subroutine for that. 2858\def\tclose#1{% 2859 {% 2860 % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font. 2861 \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font 2862 % 2863 % Switch to typewriter. 2864 \tt 2865 % 2866 % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space. 2867 \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}% 2868 % 2869 % Turn off hyphenation. 2870 \nohyphenation 2871 % 2872 \rawbackslash 2873 \plainfrenchspacing 2874 #1% 2875 }% 2876 \null % reset spacefactor to 1000 2877} 2878 2879% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code. 2880% (But see \codedashfinish below.) 2881% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes 2882% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. 2883% 2884% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control 2885% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. 2886% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) 2887% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms. 2888{ 2889 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 2890 \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active 2891 \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions 2892 % 2893 \global\def\code{\begingroup 2894 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 2895 % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers. 2896 \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active 2897 \ifallowcodebreaks 2898 \let-\codedash 2899 \let_\codeunder 2900 \else 2901 \let-\normaldash 2902 \let_\realunder 2903 \fi 2904 % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break 2905 % after the hyphen. 2906 \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash 2907 % 2908 \codex 2909 } 2910 % 2911 \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish} 2912 \gdef\codedashfinish{% 2913 \normaldash % always output the dash character itself. 2914 % 2915 % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless 2916 % (a) the next character is a -, or 2917 % (b) the preceding character is a -. 2918 % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -. 2919 % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b. 2920 \ifx\next\codedash \else 2921 \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 2922 \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi 2923 \fi 2924 % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a 2925 % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise. As in @code{- a}. 2926 \global\let\codedashprev= \next 2927 } 2928} 2929\def\normaldash{-} 2930% 2931\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} 2932 2933\def\codeunder{% 2934 % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _ 2935 % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.) 2936 % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us 2937 % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop. 2938 \ifusingtt{\ifmmode 2939 \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_. 2940 \else\normalunderscore \fi 2941 \discretionary{}{}{}}% 2942 {\_}% 2943} 2944 2945% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g., 2946% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is bad. 2947% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at - 2948% and _ on and off. 2949% 2950\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue 2951 2952\def\keywordtrue{true} 2953\def\keywordfalse{false} 2954 2955\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{% 2956 \def\txiarg{#1}% 2957 \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue 2958 \allowcodebreakstrue 2959 \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse 2960 \allowcodebreaksfalse 2961 \else 2962 \errhelp = \EMsimple 2963 \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}% 2964 \fi\fi 2965} 2966 2967% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary, 2968% so use \code rather than \samp. 2969\let\command=\code 2970\let\env=\code 2971\let\file=\code 2972\let\option=\code 2973 2974% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional 2975% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and 2976% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in 2977% addition to) the url itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. 2978 2979% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second 2980% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target). 2981\newif\ifurefurlonlylink 2982 2983% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected 2984% places within the url. (There used to be another version, which 2985% didn't support automatic breaking.) 2986\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak} 2987\let\uref=\urefbreak 2988% 2989\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish} 2990\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example 2991 \unsepspaces 2992 \pdfurl{#1}% 2993 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 2994 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2995 \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that 2996 \else 2997 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg 2998 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt 2999 \ifpdf 3000 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 3001 \ifurefurlonlylink 3002 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3003 \unhbox0 3004 \else 3005 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3006 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3007 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3008 \fi 3009 \else 3010 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3011 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url 3012 \else 3013 % For XeTeX 3014 \ifurefurlonlylink 3015 % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg 3016 \unhbox0 3017 \else 3018 % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency, 3019 % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc. 3020 \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% 3021 \fi 3022 \fi 3023 \fi 3024 \else 3025 \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it 3026 \fi 3027 \fi 3028 \endlink 3029\endgroup} 3030 3031% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only). 3032\def\urefcatcodes{% 3033 \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active 3034 \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active 3035 \catcode`\/=\active 3036} 3037{ 3038 \urefcatcodes 3039 % 3040 \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup 3041 \setupmarkupstyle{code}% 3042 \urefcatcodes 3043 \let&\urefcodeamp 3044 \let.\urefcodedot 3045 \let#\urefcodehash 3046 \let?\urefcodequest 3047 \let/\urefcodeslash 3048 \codex 3049 } 3050 % 3051 % By default, they are just regular characters. 3052 \global\def&{\normalamp} 3053 \global\def.{\normaldot} 3054 \global\def#{\normalhash} 3055 \global\def?{\normalquest} 3056 \global\def/{\normalslash} 3057} 3058 3059% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help 3060% line breaking of long url's. The unequal skips make look better in 3061% cmtt at least, especially for dots. 3062\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em} 3063\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em} 3064\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3065\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax} 3066% 3067\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch} 3068\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch} 3069\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch} 3070\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch} 3071\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish} 3072{ 3073 \catcode`\/=\active 3074 \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{% 3075 \urefprestretch \slashChar 3076 % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of 3077 % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://. 3078 \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi 3079 } 3080} 3081 3082% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special 3083% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so 3084% allow that. Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control. 3085% 3086\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{% 3087 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3088 \ifx\txiarg\wordnone 3089 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3090 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore 3091 \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak} 3092 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter 3093 \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak} 3094 \else 3095 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3096 \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3097 \fi\fi\fi 3098} 3099\def\wordafter{after} 3100\def\wordbefore{before} 3101\def\wordnone{none} 3102 3103\urefbreakstyle after 3104 3105% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it. 3106% 3107\let\url=\uref 3108 3109% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97. 3110% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf. 3111% 3112%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} 3113\ifpdf 3114 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3115 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3116 \unsepspaces 3117 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3118 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3119 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3120 \endlink 3121 \endgroup} 3122\else 3123 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 3124 \let\email=\uref 3125 \else 3126 \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish} 3127 \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup 3128 \unsepspaces 3129 \pdfurl{mailto:#1}% 3130 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 3131 \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi 3132 \endlink 3133 \endgroup} 3134 \fi 3135\fi 3136 3137% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), 3138% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), 3139% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). 3140\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{% 3141 \def\txiarg{#1}% 3142 \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct 3143 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% 3144 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample 3145 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3146 \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode 3147 \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% 3148 \else 3149 \errhelp = \EMsimple 3150 \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}% 3151 \fi\fi\fi 3152} 3153\def\worddistinct{distinct} 3154\def\wordexample{example} 3155\def\wordcode{code} 3156 3157% Default is `distinct'. 3158\kbdinputstyle distinct 3159 3160% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, 3161% then @kbd has no effect. 3162\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}} 3163 3164\def\xkey{\key} 3165\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{% 3166 \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% 3167 \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% 3168 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3169 \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi 3170} 3171 3172% definition of @key that produces a lozenge. Doesn't adjust to text size. 3173%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1} 3174%\font\keysy=cmsy9 3175%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{% 3176% \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% 3177% \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt 3178% \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% 3179% \kern-0.4pt\hrule}% 3180% \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} 3181 3182% definition of @key with no lozenge. If the current font is already 3183% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle. But 3184% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt. 3185% 3186\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}% 3187 \nohyphenation 3188 \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi 3189 #1}\null} 3190 3191% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...} 3192\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup} 3193 3194% @clickstyle @arrow (by default) 3195\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}} 3196\def\click{\arrow} 3197 3198% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the 3199% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. 3200% 3201\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} 3202 3203% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like. 3204% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for 3205% all-uppercase. 3206% 3207\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish} 3208\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3209 {\switchtolsize #1}% 3210 \def\temp{#2}% 3211 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3212 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3213 \fi 3214 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3215} 3216 3217% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like. 3218% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing. 3219% 3220\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish} 3221\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{% 3222 {\plainfrenchspacing #1}% 3223 \def\temp{#2}% 3224 \ifx\temp\empty \else 3225 \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})% 3226 \fi 3227 \null % reset \spacefactor=1000 3228} 3229 3230% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example. 3231% 3232\def\asis#1{#1} 3233 3234% @math outputs its argument in math mode. 3235% 3236% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean 3237% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make 3238% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam, 3239% which is what @var uses. 3240{ 3241 \catcode`\_ = \active 3242 \gdef\mathunderscore{% 3243 \catcode`\_=\active 3244 \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}% 3245 } 3246} 3247% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \. 3248% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no 3249% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care. 3250% 3251% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\. 3252\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi} 3253% 3254\def\math{% 3255 \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already 3256 \tex 3257 \mathunderscore 3258 \let\\ = \mathbackslash 3259 \mathactive 3260 % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode 3261 \let\"=\ddot 3262 \let\'=\acute 3263 \let\==\bar 3264 \let\^=\hat 3265 \let\`=\grave 3266 \let\u=\breve 3267 \let\v=\check 3268 \let\~=\tilde 3269 \let\dotaccent=\dot 3270 % have to provide another name for sup operator 3271 \let\mathopsup=\sup 3272 $\expandafter\finishmath\fi 3273} 3274\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex. 3275 3276% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math. 3277% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument 3278% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section). 3279% 3280{ 3281 \catcode`^ = \active 3282 \catcode`< = \active 3283 \catcode`> = \active 3284 \catcode`+ = \active 3285 \catcode`' = \active 3286 \gdef\mathactive{% 3287 \let^ = \ptexhat 3288 \let< = \ptexless 3289 \let> = \ptexgtr 3290 \let+ = \ptexplus 3291 \let' = \ptexquoteright 3292 } 3293} 3294 3295% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript. 3296% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch 3297% into text mode, with smaller fonts. This is a different font than the 3298% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not 3299% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices. 3300% 3301\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi} 3302\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3303% 3304\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi} 3305\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}% 3306 3307% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}. 3308% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex, 3309% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about. 3310% 3311\def\outfmtnametex{tex} 3312% 3313\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish} 3314\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{% 3315 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3316 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3317} 3318% 3319% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if 3320% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT. 3321\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish} 3322\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{% 3323 \def\inlinefmtname{#1}% 3324 \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi 3325} 3326% 3327% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid 3328% setting catcodes prematurely. Doing it this way means that, for 3329% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being 3330% ignored. But this isn't important because if people want a literal 3331% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as 3332% well use a command to get a left brace too. We could re-use the 3333% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill. 3334% 3335\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw} 3336\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish} 3337\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{% 3338 \def\inlinerawname{#1}% 3339 \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi 3340 \endgroup % close group opened by \tex. 3341} 3342 3343% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set. 3344% 3345\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish} 3346\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{% 3347 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3348 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax 3349 \else\ignorespaces#2\fi 3350} 3351 3352% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set. 3353% 3354\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish} 3355\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{% 3356 \def\inlinevarname{#1}% 3357 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi 3358} 3359 3360 3361\message{glyphs,} 3362% and logos. 3363 3364% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}. 3365\def\@{\char64 } 3366\let\atchar=\@ 3367 3368% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters. 3369\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}} 3370\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}} 3371\let\{=\lbracechar 3372\let\}=\rbracechar 3373 3374% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems. 3375\let\comma = , 3376 3377% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent 3378% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H. 3379\let\, = \ptexc 3380\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot 3381\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} 3382\let\tieaccent = \ptext 3383\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb 3384\let\udotaccent = \d 3385 3386% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm 3387% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss. 3388\def\questiondown{?`} 3389\def\exclamdown{!`} 3390\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}} 3391\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}} 3392 3393% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. 3394\def\imacro{i} 3395\def\jmacro{j} 3396\def\dotless#1{% 3397 \def\temp{#1}% 3398 \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi 3399 \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi 3400 \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% 3401 \fi\fi 3402} 3403 3404% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a 3405% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.) 3406% 3407\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 } 3408 3409% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in 3410% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most 3411% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using 3412% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and 3413% \scriptscriptstyle). 3414% 3415\def\LaTeX{% 3416 L\kern-.36em 3417 {\setbox0=\hbox{T}% 3418 \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{% 3419 \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt 3420 % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX. 3421 % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt. 3422 \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$% 3423 \else 3424 % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize. 3425 \switchtolllsize A% 3426 \fi 3427 }% 3428 \vss 3429 }}% 3430 \kern-.15em 3431 \TeX 3432} 3433 3434% Some math mode symbols. Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode 3435% unless we are already there. Expansion tricks may not be needed here, 3436% but safer, and can't hurt. 3437\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi} 3438\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$} 3439% 3440\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet} 3441\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge} 3442\def\leq{\ensuremath\le} 3443\def\minus{\ensuremath-} 3444 3445% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font. 3446% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm 3447% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand, 3448% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do 3449% whichever is larger. 3450% 3451\def\dots{% 3452 \leavevmode 3453 \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods 3454 \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em 3455 \dimen0 = \wd0 3456 \else 3457 \dimen0 = 1.5em 3458 \fi 3459 \hbox to \dimen0{% 3460 \hskip 0pt plus.25fil 3461 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3462 .\hskip 0pt plus1fil 3463 .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil 3464 }% 3465} 3466 3467% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. 3468% 3469\def\enddots{% 3470 \dots 3471 \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor 3472} 3473 3474% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. 3475% 3476% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of 3477% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em. 3478% 3479\def\point{$\star$} 3480\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}} 3481\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} 3482\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} 3483\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} 3484\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} 3485 3486% The @error{} command. 3487% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. 3488% 3489\newbox\errorbox 3490% 3491{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box. 3492\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules 3493% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.) 3494\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt} 3495% 3496\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil 3497 \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right. 3498 \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules. 3499 \vbox{% 3500 \hrule height\dimen2 3501 \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text. 3502 \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below. 3503 \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right. 3504 \hrule height\dimen2} 3505 \hfil} 3506% 3507\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox} 3508 3509% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font. 3510% 3511\def\pounds{{\it\$}} 3512 3513% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style. 3514% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik 3515% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and 3516% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need). 3517% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym. 3518% 3519% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore 3520% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular 3521% font height. 3522% 3523% feymr - regular 3524% feymo - slanted 3525% feybr - bold 3526% feybo - bold slanted 3527% 3528% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge. 3529% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide. 3530% Hmm. 3531% 3532% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols? 3533% Hope not. 3534% 3535% 3536\def\euro{{\eurofont e}} 3537\def\eurofont{% 3538 % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in 3539 % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that 3540 % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the 3541 % font installed. 3542 % 3543 % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale 3544 % that to the current nominal size. 3545 % 3546 % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but 3547 % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts. 3548 % 3549 \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3550 % 3551 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3552 % bold: 3553 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize 3554 \else 3555 % regular: 3556 \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize 3557 \fi 3558 \thiseurofont 3559} 3560 3561% Glyphs from the EC fonts. We don't use \let for the aliases, because 3562% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect 3563% the redefinition. 3564% 3565% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters. 3566\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth 3567\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth 3568\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn 3569\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn 3570% 3571\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}} 3572\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft} 3573\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}} 3574\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright} 3575\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}} 3576\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}} 3577\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}} 3578\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}} 3579% 3580% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but 3581% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the 3582% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer 3583% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc. 3584% 3585% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using 3586% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in 3587% the same EC font. 3588\def\ogonek#1{{% 3589 \def\temp{#1}% 3590 \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek 3591 \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek 3592 \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek 3593 \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek 3594 \else 3595 \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}% 3596 \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1% 3597 \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}% 3598 \fi 3599 \fi\fi\fi\fi 3600 }% 3601} 3602\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A} 3603\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a} 3604\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E} 3605\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e} 3606% 3607% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format) 3608% for non-CM glyphs. That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text 3609% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding). Both are part of the ec 3610% package and follow the same conventions. 3611% 3612\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}} 3613\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}} 3614% 3615\def\etcfont#1{% 3616 % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this 3617 % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German 3618 % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so 3619 % hopefully nobody will notice/care. 3620 \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}% 3621 \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}% 3622 \ifmonospace 3623 % typewriter: 3624 \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3625 \else 3626 \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename 3627 % bold: 3628 \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3629 \else 3630 % regular: 3631 \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize 3632 \fi 3633 \fi 3634 \thisecfont 3635} 3636 3637% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really 3638% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now. 3639% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright. 3640% 3641\def\registeredsymbol{% 3642 $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}% 3643 \hfil\crcr\Orb}}% 3644 }$% 3645} 3646 3647% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign. 3648% 3649\def\textdegree{$^\circ$} 3650 3651% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with: 3652% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38 3653% so we'll define it if necessary. 3654% 3655\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined 3656\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D} 3657\fi 3658 3659% Quotes. 3660\chardef\quotedblleft="5C 3661\chardef\quotedblright=`\" 3662\chardef\quoteleft=`\` 3663\chardef\quoteright=`\' 3664 3665 3666\message{page headings,} 3667 3668\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in 3669\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc 3670 3671% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. 3672\newif\ifseenauthor 3673\newif\iffinishedtitlepage 3674 3675% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or 3676% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete. 3677\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3678 \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3679 command; move your @contents command if you want the contents 3680 after the title page.}}% 3681\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{% 3682 \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo 3683 command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 3684 want the contents after the title page.}}% 3685 3686\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{% 3687 \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% 3688 \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} 3689 3690\envdef\titlepage{% 3691 % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage. 3692 \begingroup 3693 \parindent=0pt \textfonts 3694 % Leave some space at the very top of the page. 3695 \vglue\titlepagetopglue 3696 % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. 3697 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3698 % 3699 % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space 3700 % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second. 3701 \let\oldpage = \page 3702 \def\page{% 3703 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3704 \finishtitlepage 3705 \fi 3706 \let\page = \oldpage 3707 \page 3708 \null 3709 }% 3710} 3711 3712\def\Etitlepage{% 3713 \iffinishedtitlepage\else 3714 \finishtitlepage 3715 \fi 3716 % It is important to do the page break before ending the group, 3717 % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group. 3718 % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page 3719 % after the title page, which we certainly don't want. 3720 \oldpage 3721 \endgroup 3722 % 3723 % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are 3724 % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers. 3725 \HEADINGSon 3726} 3727 3728\def\finishtitlepage{% 3729 \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize 3730 \vskip\titlepagebottomglue 3731 \finishedtitlepagetrue 3732} 3733 3734% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation, 3735% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right. This should be used 3736% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should 3737% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group. 3738% 3739\def\raggedtitlesettings{% 3740 \rm 3741 \hyphenpenalty=10000 3742 \parindent=0pt 3743 \tolerance=5000 3744 \ptexraggedright 3745} 3746 3747% Macros to be used within @titlepage: 3748 3749\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont 3750\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines} 3751 3752\parseargdef\title{% 3753 \checkenv\titlepage 3754 \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 3755 % print a rule at the page bottom also. 3756 \finishedtitlepagefalse 3757 \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt 3758} 3759 3760\parseargdef\subtitle{% 3761 \checkenv\titlepage 3762 {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}% 3763} 3764 3765% @author should come last, but may come many times. 3766% It can also be used inside @quotation. 3767% 3768\parseargdef\author{% 3769 \def\temp{\quotation}% 3770 \ifx\thisenv\temp 3771 \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation. 3772 \else 3773 \checkenv\titlepage 3774 \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi 3775 {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}% 3776 \fi 3777} 3778 3779 3780% Set up page headings and footings. 3781 3782\let\thispage=\folio 3783 3784\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages 3785\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages 3786\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages 3787\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages 3788 3789% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables 3790\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline 3791 \else \the\evenheadline \fi}} 3792\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline 3793 \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook} 3794\let\HEADINGShook=\relax 3795 3796% Commands to set those variables. 3797% For example, this is what @headings on does 3798% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter 3799% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle 3800% @evenfooting @thisfile|| 3801% @oddfooting ||@thisfile 3802 3803 3804\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx} 3805\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3806\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3807\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3808 3809\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx} 3810\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3811\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3812\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3813 3814\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% 3815 3816\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx} 3817\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3818\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3819\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} 3820 3821\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx} 3822\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish} 3823\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{% 3824 \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% 3825 % 3826 % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume 3827 % @evenfooting will not be used by itself. 3828 \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt 3829 \global\advance\vsize by -12pt 3830} 3831 3832\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} 3833 3834% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page 3835% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page 3836% 3837% The same set of arguments for: 3838% 3839% @oddheadingmarks 3840% @evenfootingmarks 3841% @oddfootingmarks 3842% @everyheadingmarks 3843% @everyfootingmarks 3844 3845% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks, 3846% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of 3847% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks. 3848% 3849\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}} 3850\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}} 3851\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}} 3852\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}} 3853\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1} 3854 \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} } 3855\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1} 3856 \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} } 3857% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom. 3858\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {% 3859 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname 3860 \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp 3861} 3862 3863\everyheadingmarks bottom 3864\everyfootingmarks bottom 3865 3866% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. 3867% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. 3868% @headings off turns them off. 3869% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. 3870% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3871% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. 3872% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. 3873% By default, they are off at the start of a document, 3874% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. 3875 3876\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} 3877 3878\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination 3879 \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}% 3880 \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}% 3881} 3882 3883\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting 3884\HEADINGSoff % it's the default 3885 3886% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1. 3887% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner, 3888% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document 3889% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top 3890% edge of all pages. 3891\def\HEADINGSdouble{% 3892\global\pageno=1 3893\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3894\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3895\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3896\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3897\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3898} 3899\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3900 3901% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, 3902% page number on top right. 3903\def\HEADINGSsingle{% 3904\global\pageno=1 3905\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3906\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3907\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3908\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3909\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3910} 3911\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} 3912 3913\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex} 3914\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter 3915\def\HEADINGSdoublex{% 3916\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3917\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3918\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} 3919\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3920\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 3921} 3922 3923\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} 3924\def\HEADINGSsinglex{% 3925\global\evenfootline={\hfil} 3926\global\oddfootline={\hfil} 3927\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3928\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}} 3929\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 3930} 3931 3932% Subroutines used in generating headings 3933% This produces Day Month Year style of output. 3934% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set 3935% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this). 3936\ifx\today\thisisundefined 3937\def\today{% 3938 \number\day\space 3939 \ifcase\month 3940 \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr 3941 \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug 3942 \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec 3943 \fi 3944 \space\number\year} 3945\fi 3946 3947% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings. 3948% It generates no output of its own. 3949\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle} 3950\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}} 3951 3952 3953\message{tables,} 3954% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x). 3955 3956% default indentation of table text 3957\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in 3958% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text 3959\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in 3960% margin between end of table item and start of table text. 3961\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in 3962 3963% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin 3964\newdimen\itemmax 3965 3966% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with 3967% these defs. 3968% They also define \itemindex 3969% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none). 3970 3971\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip 3972 3973\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} 3974 3975\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} 3976\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} 3977 3978\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup % 3979 \advance\hsize by -\rightskip 3980 \advance\hsize by -\tableindent 3981 \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}% 3982 \itemindex{#1}% 3983 \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. 3984 % 3985 % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line 3986 % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that 3987 % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next 3988 % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the 3989 % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space. 3990 \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax 3991 % 3992 % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping, 3993 % but leave it ragged-right. 3994 \begingroup 3995 \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent 3996 \advance\hsize by\tableindent 3997 \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax 3998 \leavevmode\unhbox0\par 3999 \endgroup 4000 % 4001 % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the 4002 % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started. 4003 \nobreak \vskip-\parskip 4004 % 4005 % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if 4006 % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no 4007 % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would 4008 % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this 4009 % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert 4010 % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also. 4011 % 4012 \penalty 10001 4013 \endgroup 4014 \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse 4015 \else 4016 % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the 4017 % following text (if any) will end up on the same line. 4018 \noindent 4019 % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in 4020 % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and 4021 % eventually be printed. 4022 \nobreak\kern-\tableindent 4023 \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 4024 \unhbox0 4025 \nobreak\kern\dimen0 4026 \endgroup 4027 \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue 4028 \fi 4029} 4030 4031\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}} 4032\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}} 4033 4034% @table, @ftable, @vtable. 4035\envdef\table{% 4036 \let\itemindex\gobble 4037 \tablecheck{table}% 4038} 4039\envdef\ftable{% 4040 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}% 4041 \tablecheck{ftable}% 4042} 4043\envdef\vtable{% 4044 \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}% 4045 \tablecheck{vtable}% 4046} 4047\def\tablecheck#1{% 4048 \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active 4049 \endgroup 4050 \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is 4051 that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}% 4052 \def\next{\doignore{#1}}% 4053 \else 4054 \let\next\tablex 4055 \fi 4056 \next 4057} 4058\def\tablex#1{% 4059 \def\itemindicate{#1}% 4060 \parsearg\tabley 4061} 4062\def\tabley#1{% 4063 {% 4064 \makevalueexpandable 4065 \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}% 4066 \expandafter 4067 }\temp \endtablez 4068} 4069\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{% 4070 \aboveenvbreak 4071 \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi 4072 \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi 4073 \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi 4074 \itemmax=\tableindent 4075 \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin 4076 \advance \leftskip by \tableindent 4077 \exdentamount=\tableindent 4078 \parindent = 0pt 4079 \parskip = \smallskipamount 4080 \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4081 \let\item = \internalBitem 4082 \let\itemx = \internalBitemx 4083} 4084\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak} 4085\let\Eftable\Etable 4086\let\Evtable\Etable 4087\let\Eitemize\Etable 4088\let\Eenumerate\Etable 4089 4090% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize 4091 4092\newcount \itemno 4093 4094\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize} 4095 4096\def\doitemize#1{% 4097 \aboveenvbreak 4098 \itemmax=\itemindent 4099 \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin 4100 \advance\leftskip by \itemindent 4101 \exdentamount=\itemindent 4102 \parindent=0pt 4103 \parskip=\smallskipamount 4104 \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi 4105 % 4106 % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says 4107 % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error 4108 % right away at the @itemize. It's not the best error message in the 4109 % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item. This means if 4110 % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w. 4111 \def\itemcontents{#1}% 4112 \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}% 4113 % 4114 % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet. 4115 \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi 4116 % 4117 \let\item=\itemizeitem 4118} 4119 4120% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate. 4121% 4122\def\itemizeitem{% 4123 \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations 4124 {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break 4125 {% 4126 % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a 4127 % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have 4128 % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero 4129 % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the 4130 % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there 4131 % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much 4132 % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least 4133 % that's the theory. 4134 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi 4135 \noindent 4136 \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}% 4137 % 4138 \ifinner\else 4139 \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item. 4140 \fi 4141 % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an 4142 % @itemize looks awful there. 4143 }% 4144 \flushcr 4145} 4146 4147% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in 4148% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder. 4149% 4150\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}% 4151 4152% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter, 4153% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No 4154% argument is the same as `1'. 4155% 4156\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey} 4157\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{% 4158 % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'. 4159 \def\thearg{#1}% 4160 \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi 4161 % 4162 % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a 4163 % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number. 4164 % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made. 4165 % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at 4166 % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.) 4167 \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark 4168 \ifx\rest\empty 4169 % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything. 4170 % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero. 4171 % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and 4172 % not equal to itself. 4173 % Otherwise, we assume it's a number. 4174 % 4175 % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from 4176 % continuing to look for a <number>. 4177 % 4178 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax 4179 \numericenumerate % a number (we hope) 4180 \else 4181 % It's a letter. 4182 \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax 4183 \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter 4184 \else 4185 \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter 4186 \fi 4187 \fi 4188 \else 4189 % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number. 4190 \numericenumerate 4191 \fi 4192} 4193 4194% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is 4195% given in \thearg. 4196% 4197\def\numericenumerate{% 4198 \itemno = \thearg 4199 \startenumeration{\the\itemno}% 4200} 4201 4202% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg. 4203\def\lowercaseenumerate{% 4204 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4205 \startenumeration{% 4206 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4207 \ifnum\itemno=0 4208 \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4209 alphabet}% 4210 \fi 4211 \char\lccode\itemno 4212 }% 4213} 4214 4215% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg. 4216\def\uppercaseenumerate{% 4217 \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg 4218 \startenumeration{% 4219 % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet. 4220 \ifnum\itemno=0 4221 \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger 4222 alphabet} 4223 \fi 4224 \char\uccode\itemno 4225 }% 4226} 4227 4228% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the 4229% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in 4230% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno. 4231% 4232\def\startenumeration#1{% 4233 \advance\itemno by -1 4234 \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr 4235} 4236 4237% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg 4238% to @enumerate. 4239% 4240\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}} 4241\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}} 4242\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4243\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate} 4244 4245 4246% @multitable macros 4247% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 4248% 4249% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. 4250% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width 4251% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, 4252% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. 4253 4254% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines. 4255 4256% To make preamble: 4257% 4258% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: 4259% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 4260% @item ... 4261% 4262% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total 4263% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many 4264% columns as desired. 4265 4266 4267% Or use a template: 4268% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4269% @item ... 4270% using the widest term desired in each column. 4271 4272% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column 4273% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's 4274% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, 4275% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. 4276 4277% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt 4278% if they are. 4279 4280% Sample multitable: 4281 4282% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} 4283% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col 4284% @item 4285% first col stuff 4286% @tab 4287% second col stuff 4288% @tab 4289% third col 4290% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff 4291% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. 4292% 4293% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. 4294% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. 4295% @end multitable 4296 4297% Default dimensions may be reset by user. 4298% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. 4299% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. 4300% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. 4301% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline 4302% to baseline. 4303% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. 4304% 4305\newskip\multitableparskip 4306\newskip\multitableparindent 4307\newdimen\multitablecolspace 4308\newskip\multitablelinespace 4309\multitableparskip=0pt 4310\multitableparindent=6pt 4311\multitablecolspace=12pt 4312\multitablelinespace=0pt 4313 4314% Macros used to set up halign preamble: 4315% 4316\let\endsetuptable\relax 4317\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} 4318\let\columnfractions\relax 4319\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} 4320\newif\ifsetpercent 4321 4322% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might 4323% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is. 4324% 4325\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {% 4326 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4327 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}% 4328 \setuptable 4329} 4330 4331\newcount\colcount 4332\def\setuptable#1{% 4333 \def\firstarg{#1}% 4334 \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable 4335 \let\go = \relax 4336 \else 4337 \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions 4338 \global\setpercenttrue 4339 \else 4340 \ifsetpercent 4341 \let\go\pickupwholefraction 4342 \else 4343 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4344 \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a 4345 % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway. 4346 \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% 4347 \fi 4348 \fi 4349 \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction 4350 % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so 4351 % we'll always have a period there to be parsed. 4352 \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% 4353 \else 4354 \let\go = \setuptable 4355 \fi% 4356 \fi 4357 \go 4358} 4359 4360% multitable-only commands. 4361% 4362% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold. Assignments 4363% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an 4364% alignment entry. \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to 4365% undo it ourselves. 4366\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable 4367\def\headitem{% 4368 \checkenv\multitable 4369 \crcr 4370 \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings 4371 \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs 4372 \the\everytab % for the first item 4373}% 4374% 4375% default for tables with no headings. 4376\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4377% 4378% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template 4379% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until 4380% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve. 4381% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99. 4382\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}% 4383 4384% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: 4385% 4386\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab. 4387% 4388\envdef\multitable{% 4389 \vskip\parskip 4390 \startsavinginserts 4391 % 4392 % @item within a multitable starts a normal row. 4393 % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries 4394 % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka 4395 % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize. 4396 \def\item{\crcr}% 4397 % 4398 \tolerance=9500 4399 \hbadness=9500 4400 \setmultitablespacing 4401 \parskip=\multitableparskip 4402 \parindent=\multitableparindent 4403 \overfullrule=0pt 4404 \global\colcount=0 4405 % 4406 \everycr = {% 4407 \noalign{% 4408 \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem. 4409 \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter. 4410 % 4411 % Check for saved footnotes, etc.: 4412 \checkinserts 4413 % 4414 % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset: 4415 \headitemcrhook 4416 \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax 4417 }% 4418 }% 4419 % 4420 \parsearg\domultitable 4421} 4422\def\domultitable#1{% 4423 % To parse everything between @multitable and @item: 4424 \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable 4425 % 4426 % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will 4427 % be used as many times as user calls for columns. 4428 % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and 4429 % continue for many paragraphs if desired. 4430 \halign\bgroup &% 4431 \global\advance\colcount by 1 4432 \multistrut 4433 \vtop{% 4434 % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width: 4435 \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname 4436 % 4437 % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other 4438 % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after 4439 % the first one. 4440 % 4441 % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace 4442 % to the width of each template entry. 4443 % 4444 % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will 4445 % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip 4446 % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at 4447 % left margin and final column will justify at right margin. 4448 % 4449 % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. 4450 \rightskip=0pt 4451 \ifnum\colcount=1 4452 % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. 4453 \advance\hsize by\leftskip 4454 \else 4455 \ifsetpercent \else 4456 % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize 4457 % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. 4458 \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace 4459 \fi 4460 % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: 4461 \leftskip=\multitablecolspace 4462 \fi 4463 % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious 4464 % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the 4465 % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. 4466 % For example: 4467 % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 4468 % @item @code{#} 4469 % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. 4470 % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively 4471 % marking characters. 4472 \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut 4473 }\cr 4474} 4475\def\Emultitable{% 4476 \crcr 4477 \egroup % end the \halign 4478 \global\setpercentfalse 4479} 4480 4481\def\setmultitablespacing{% 4482 \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing 4483 % 4484 % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in 4485 % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on 4486 % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off. 4487 % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100. 4488\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt 4489\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip 4490\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0 4491\fi 4492% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of 4493% table. If not, do nothing. 4494% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. 4495\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace 4496\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4497\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4498 % than skip between lines in the table. 4499\fi% 4500\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt 4501\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace 4502\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller 4503 % than skip between lines in the table. 4504\fi} 4505 4506 4507\message{conditionals,} 4508 4509% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext, 4510% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't 4511% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we 4512% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't 4513% attempt to close an environment group. 4514% 4515\def\makecond#1{% 4516 \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax 4517 \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1 4518} 4519\makecond{iftex} 4520\makecond{ifnotdocbook} 4521\makecond{ifnothtml} 4522\makecond{ifnotinfo} 4523\makecond{ifnotplaintext} 4524\makecond{ifnotxml} 4525 4526% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like. 4527% 4528\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} 4529\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}} 4530\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}} 4531\def\html{\doignore{html}} 4532\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}} 4533\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} 4534\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} 4535\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} 4536\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}} 4537\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}} 4538\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} 4539\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} 4540\def\xml{\doignore{xml}} 4541 4542% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals. 4543% 4544% A count to remember the depth of nesting. 4545\newcount\doignorecount 4546 4547\def\doignore#1{\begingroup 4548 % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode: 4549 \obeylines 4550 \catcode`\@ = \other 4551 \catcode`\{ = \other 4552 \catcode`\} = \other 4553 % 4554 % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. 4555 \spaceisspace 4556 % 4557 % Count number of #1's that we've seen. 4558 \doignorecount = 0 4559 % 4560 % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'. 4561 \dodoignore{#1}% 4562} 4563 4564{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source. 4565 \obeylines % 4566 % 4567 \gdef\dodoignore#1{% 4568 % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'. 4569 % 4570 % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'. 4571 \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{% 4572 \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}% 4573 % 4574 % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a 4575 % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for 4576 % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.) 4577 \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}% 4578 % 4579 % And now expand that command. 4580 \doignoretext ^^M% 4581 }% 4582} 4583 4584\def\doignoreyyy#1{% 4585 \def\temp{#1}% 4586 \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found. 4587 \let\next\doignoretextzzz 4588 \else % Found a nested condition, ... 4589 \advance\doignorecount by 1 4590 \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another. 4591 % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example). 4592 \fi 4593 \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro. 4594} 4595 4596% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_". 4597% 4598\def\doignoretextzzz#1{% 4599 \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end. 4600 \let\next\enddoignore 4601 \else % Still inside a nested condition. 4602 \advance\doignorecount by -1 4603 \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end. 4604 \fi 4605 \next 4606} 4607 4608% Finish off ignored text. 4609{ \obeylines% 4610 % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim 4611 % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional 4612 % would result in a blank line in the output. 4613 \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}% 4614} 4615 4616 4617% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. 4618% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE. 4619% 4620% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be 4621% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our 4622% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we 4623% didn't need it. 4624% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10. 4625% 4626\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} 4627\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% 4628 {% 4629 \makevalueexpandable 4630 \def\temp{#2}% 4631 \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}% 4632 \ifx\temp\empty 4633 \next{}% 4634 \else 4635 \setzzz#2\endsetzzz 4636 \fi 4637 }% 4638} 4639% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. 4640\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}} 4641 4642% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. 4643% 4644\parseargdef\clear{% 4645 {% 4646 \makevalueexpandable 4647 \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax 4648 }% 4649} 4650 4651% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. 4652\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx} 4653\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} 4654{ 4655 \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active 4656 % 4657 \gdef\makevalueexpandable{% 4658 \let\value = \expandablevalue 4659 % We don't want these characters active, ... 4660 \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other 4661 % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if 4662 % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though. 4663 % So \let them to their normal equivalents. 4664 \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore 4665 } 4666} 4667 4668% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's 4669% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies). 4670% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since 4671% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the 4672% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain 4673% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work 4674% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). 4675% 4676% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value* 4677% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr 4678% dot accent at position 126 instead). No fix comes to mind, and it's 4679% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it. 4680% 4681\def\expandablevalue#1{% 4682 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4683 {[No value for ``#1'']}% 4684 \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}% 4685 \else 4686 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4687 \fi 4688} 4689 4690% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the 4691% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX). Used when 4692% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does. 4693% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 4694% will be set by the time it is read back in. 4695% 4696% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here. 4697\def\dummyvalue#1{% 4698 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4699 \noexpand\value{#1}% 4700 \else 4701 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4702 \fi 4703} 4704 4705% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value 4706% if possible, otherwise sort late. 4707\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{% 4708 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax 4709 ZZZZZZZ 4710 \else 4711 \csname SET#1\endcsname 4712 \fi 4713} 4714 4715% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined 4716% with @set. 4717% 4718% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call 4719% \makecond and then redefine. 4720% 4721\makecond{ifset} 4722\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}} 4723\def\doifset#1#2{% 4724 {% 4725 \makevalueexpandable 4726 \let\next=\empty 4727 \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax 4728 #1% If not set, redefine \next. 4729 \fi 4730 \expandafter 4731 }\next 4732} 4733\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}} 4734 4735% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been 4736% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear. 4737% 4738% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the 4739% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set, 4740% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail. 4741% 4742\makecond{ifclear} 4743\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}} 4744\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}} 4745 4746% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written 4747% without the @) is in fact defined. We can only feasibly check at the 4748% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered 4749% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command. 4750% 4751\makecond{ifcommanddefined} 4752\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}} 4753% 4754\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{% 4755 \makevalueexpandable 4756 \let\next=\empty 4757 \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax 4758 #1% If not defined, \let\next as above. 4759 \fi 4760 \expandafter 4761 }\next 4762} 4763\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}} 4764 4765% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above. 4766\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined} 4767\def\ifcommandnotdefined{% 4768 \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}} 4769\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}} 4770 4771% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to 4772% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available. 4773\set txicommandconditionals 4774 4775% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file 4776% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. 4777\let\dircategory=\comment 4778 4779% @defininfoenclose. 4780\let\definfoenclose=\comment 4781 4782 4783\message{indexing,} 4784% Index generation facilities 4785 4786% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite 4787% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's. 4788\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}} 4789 4790% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX. 4791% It automatically defines \IXindex such that 4792% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX. 4793% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for 4794% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is IX. 4795% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long 4796% for the sake of vms. 4797% 4798\def\newindex#1{% 4799 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4800 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index 4801 \noexpand\doindex{#1}} 4802} 4803 4804% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} 4805% 4806\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex} 4807 4808% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. 4809% 4810\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} 4811% 4812\def\newcodeindex#1{% 4813 \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0 4814 \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% 4815 \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}% 4816} 4817 4818% The default indices: 4819\newindex{cp}% concepts, 4820\newcodeindex{fn}% functions, 4821\newcodeindex{vr}% variables, 4822\newcodeindex{tp}% types, 4823\newcodeindex{ky}% keys 4824\newcodeindex{pg}% and programs. 4825 4826 4827% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. 4828% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. 4829% 4830% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo 4831% inside @code. 4832% 4833\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}} 4834\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}} 4835 4836% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo), 4837% #3 the target index (bar). 4838\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{% 4839 \requireopenindexfile{#3}% 4840 % redefine \fooindfile: 4841 \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname 4842 \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp 4843 % redefine \fooindex: 4844 \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}% 4845} 4846 4847% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros. 4848% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro, 4849% and it is the two-letter name of the index. 4850 4851\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx} 4852\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}} 4853 4854% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument. 4855\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx} 4856\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} 4857 4858 4859% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file to prevent 4860% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry. 4861% 4862\def\indexdummies{% 4863 \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. 4864 \definedummyletter\@% 4865 \definedummyletter\ % 4866 % 4867 % For texindex which always views { and } as separators. 4868 \def\{{\lbracechar{}}% 4869 \def\}{\rbracechar{}}% 4870 % 4871 % Do the redefinitions. 4872 \definedummies 4873} 4874 4875% Used for the aux and toc files, where @ is the escape character. 4876% 4877\def\atdummies{% 4878 \definedummyletter\@% 4879 \definedummyletter\ % 4880 \definedummyletter\{% 4881 \definedummyletter\}% 4882 % 4883 % Do the redefinitions. 4884 \definedummies 4885 \otherbackslash 4886} 4887 4888% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively 4889% preventing its expansion. This is used only for control words, 4890% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for 4891% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word 4892% from whatever follows. 4893% 4894% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and 4895% those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then 4896% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever). 4897% 4898% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the 4899% space. 4900% 4901\def\definedummyword #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}% 4902\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}% 4903\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter 4904 4905% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies, to effectively prevent 4906% the expansion of commands. 4907% 4908\def\definedummies{% 4909 % 4910 \let\commondummyword\definedummyword 4911 \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter 4912 \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent 4913 \commondummiesnofonts 4914 % 4915 \definedummyletter\_% 4916 \definedummyletter\-% 4917 % 4918 % Non-English letters. 4919 \definedummyword\AA 4920 \definedummyword\AE 4921 \definedummyword\DH 4922 \definedummyword\L 4923 \definedummyword\O 4924 \definedummyword\OE 4925 \definedummyword\TH 4926 \definedummyword\aa 4927 \definedummyword\ae 4928 \definedummyword\dh 4929 \definedummyword\exclamdown 4930 \definedummyword\l 4931 \definedummyword\o 4932 \definedummyword\oe 4933 \definedummyword\ordf 4934 \definedummyword\ordm 4935 \definedummyword\questiondown 4936 \definedummyword\ss 4937 \definedummyword\th 4938 % 4939 % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do. 4940 \definedummyword\bf 4941 \definedummyword\gtr 4942 \definedummyword\hat 4943 \definedummyword\less 4944 \definedummyword\sf 4945 \definedummyword\sl 4946 \definedummyword\tclose 4947 \definedummyword\tt 4948 % 4949 \definedummyword\LaTeX 4950 \definedummyword\TeX 4951 % 4952 % Assorted special characters. 4953 \definedummyword\atchar 4954 \definedummyword\arrow 4955 \definedummyword\bullet 4956 \definedummyword\comma 4957 \definedummyword\copyright 4958 \definedummyword\registeredsymbol 4959 \definedummyword\dots 4960 \definedummyword\enddots 4961 \definedummyword\entrybreak 4962 \definedummyword\equiv 4963 \definedummyword\error 4964 \definedummyword\euro 4965 \definedummyword\expansion 4966 \definedummyword\geq 4967 \definedummyword\guillemetleft 4968 \definedummyword\guillemetright 4969 \definedummyword\guilsinglleft 4970 \definedummyword\guilsinglright 4971 \definedummyword\lbracechar 4972 \definedummyword\leq 4973 \definedummyword\mathopsup 4974 \definedummyword\minus 4975 \definedummyword\ogonek 4976 \definedummyword\pounds 4977 \definedummyword\point 4978 \definedummyword\print 4979 \definedummyword\quotedblbase 4980 \definedummyword\quotedblleft 4981 \definedummyword\quotedblright 4982 \definedummyword\quoteleft 4983 \definedummyword\quoteright 4984 \definedummyword\quotesinglbase 4985 \definedummyword\rbracechar 4986 \definedummyword\result 4987 \definedummyword\sub 4988 \definedummyword\sup 4989 \definedummyword\textdegree 4990 % 4991 % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write. 4992 \macrolist 4993 \let\value\dummyvalue 4994 % 4995 \normalturnoffactive 4996} 4997 4998% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts. 4999% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before 5000% using. Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters. 5001% 5002\def\commondummiesnofonts{% 5003 % Control letters and accents. 5004 \commondummyletter\!% 5005 \commondummyaccent\"% 5006 \commondummyaccent\'% 5007 \commondummyletter\*% 5008 \commondummyaccent\,% 5009 \commondummyletter\.% 5010 \commondummyletter\/% 5011 \commondummyletter\:% 5012 \commondummyaccent\=% 5013 \commondummyletter\?% 5014 \commondummyaccent\^% 5015 \commondummyaccent\`% 5016 \commondummyaccent\~% 5017 \commondummyword\u 5018 \commondummyword\v 5019 \commondummyword\H 5020 \commondummyword\dotaccent 5021 \commondummyword\ogonek 5022 \commondummyword\ringaccent 5023 \commondummyword\tieaccent 5024 \commondummyword\ubaraccent 5025 \commondummyword\udotaccent 5026 \commondummyword\dotless 5027 % 5028 % Texinfo font commands. 5029 \commondummyword\b 5030 \commondummyword\i 5031 \commondummyword\r 5032 \commondummyword\sansserif 5033 \commondummyword\sc 5034 \commondummyword\slanted 5035 \commondummyword\t 5036 % 5037 % Commands that take arguments. 5038 \commondummyword\abbr 5039 \commondummyword\acronym 5040 \commondummyword\anchor 5041 \commondummyword\cite 5042 \commondummyword\code 5043 \commondummyword\command 5044 \commondummyword\dfn 5045 \commondummyword\dmn 5046 \commondummyword\email 5047 \commondummyword\emph 5048 \commondummyword\env 5049 \commondummyword\file 5050 \commondummyword\image 5051 \commondummyword\indicateurl 5052 \commondummyword\inforef 5053 \commondummyword\kbd 5054 \commondummyword\key 5055 \commondummyword\math 5056 \commondummyword\option 5057 \commondummyword\pxref 5058 \commondummyword\ref 5059 \commondummyword\samp 5060 \commondummyword\strong 5061 \commondummyword\tie 5062 \commondummyword\U 5063 \commondummyword\uref 5064 \commondummyword\url 5065 \commondummyword\var 5066 \commondummyword\verb 5067 \commondummyword\w 5068 \commondummyword\xref 5069} 5070 5071% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}. 5072\newif\ifusebracesinindexes 5073 5074\let\indexlbrace\relax 5075\let\indexrbrace\relax 5076 5077{\catcode`\@=0 5078\catcode`\\=13 5079 @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}} 5080} 5081 5082{ 5083\catcode`\<=13 5084\catcode`\-=13 5085\catcode`\`=13 5086 \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{% 5087 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else 5088 % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term. 5089 % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.) 5090 \let`=\empty 5091 \fi 5092 % 5093 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else 5094 \backslashdisappear 5095 \fi 5096 % 5097 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else 5098 \def-{}% 5099 \fi 5100 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else 5101 \def<{}% 5102 \fi 5103 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else 5104 \def\@{}% 5105 \fi 5106 } 5107 5108 \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{% 5109 \useindexbackslash 5110 \let-\normaldash 5111 \let<\normalless 5112 \def\@{@}% 5113 } 5114} 5115 5116 5117% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index 5118% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all 5119% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string 5120% would be for a given command (usually its argument). 5121% 5122\def\indexnofonts{% 5123 % Accent commands should become @asis. 5124 \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}% 5125 % We can just ignore other control letters. 5126 \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}% 5127 % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below. 5128 \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent 5129 \commondummiesnofonts 5130 % 5131 % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command 5132 % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc. 5133 % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands. 5134 %\let\tt=\asis 5135 % 5136 \def\ { }% 5137 \def\@{@}% 5138 \def\_{\normalunderscore}% 5139 \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting 5140 % 5141 \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}% 5142 \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}% 5143 \let\lbracechar\{% 5144 \let\rbracechar\}% 5145 % 5146 % Non-English letters. 5147 \def\AA{AA}% 5148 \def\AE{AE}% 5149 \def\DH{DZZ}% 5150 \def\L{L}% 5151 \def\OE{OE}% 5152 \def\O{O}% 5153 \def\TH{TH}% 5154 \def\aa{aa}% 5155 \def\ae{ae}% 5156 \def\dh{dzz}% 5157 \def\exclamdown{!}% 5158 \def\l{l}% 5159 \def\oe{oe}% 5160 \def\ordf{a}% 5161 \def\ordm{o}% 5162 \def\o{o}% 5163 \def\questiondown{?}% 5164 \def\ss{ss}% 5165 \def\th{th}% 5166 % 5167 \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}% 5168 \def\TeX{TeX}% 5169 % 5170 % Assorted special characters. \defglyph gives the control sequence a 5171 % definition that removes the {} that follows its use. 5172 \defglyph\atchar{@}% 5173 \defglyph\arrow{->}% 5174 \defglyph\bullet{bullet}% 5175 \defglyph\comma{,}% 5176 \defglyph\copyright{copyright}% 5177 \defglyph\dots{...}% 5178 \defglyph\enddots{...}% 5179 \defglyph\equiv{==}% 5180 \defglyph\error{error}% 5181 \defglyph\euro{euro}% 5182 \defglyph\expansion{==>}% 5183 \defglyph\geq{>=}% 5184 \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}% 5185 \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}% 5186 \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}% 5187 \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}% 5188 \defglyph\leq{<=}% 5189 \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}% 5190 \defglyph\minus{-}% 5191 \defglyph\point{.}% 5192 \defglyph\pounds{pounds}% 5193 \defglyph\print{-|}% 5194 \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}% 5195 \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}% 5196 \defglyph\quotedblright{"}% 5197 \defglyph\quoteleft{`}% 5198 \defglyph\quoteright{'}% 5199 \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}% 5200 \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}% 5201 \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}% 5202 \defglyph\result{=>}% 5203 \defglyph\textdegree{o}% 5204 % 5205 % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present). 5206 % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now. 5207 % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up 5208 % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry 5209 % that starts with \. 5210 % 5211 % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them 5212 % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that 5213 % goes to end-of-line is not handled. 5214 % 5215 \macrolist 5216 \let\value\indexnofontsvalue 5217} 5218\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above 5219 5220 5221 5222 5223\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? 5224 5225% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. 5226% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text. 5227\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}} 5228 5229% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic} 5230% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index. 5231% TODO: Two-level index? Operation index? 5232 5233% Workhorse for all indexes. 5234% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- 5235% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception 5236% is with most defuns, which call us directly). 5237% 5238\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% 5239 \iflinks 5240 {% 5241 \requireopenindexfile{#1}% 5242 % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg). 5243 \toks0 = {#2}% 5244 % If third arg is present, precede it with a space. 5245 \def\thirdarg{#3}% 5246 \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else 5247 \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}% 5248 \fi 5249 % 5250 \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}% 5251 % 5252 \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite 5253 }% 5254 \fi 5255} 5256 5257% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it. 5258\def\requireopenindexfile#1{% 5259\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0 5260 \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname 5261 \edef\suffix{#1}% 5262 % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output 5263 % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead. 5264 \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi 5265 % Open the file 5266 \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix 5267 % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 5268 % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for 5269 % preceding skips. 5270 \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}% 5271\fi} 5272\def\indexisfl{fl} 5273 5274% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in 5275% the index files. 5276\let\indexbackslash=\relax 5277{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active 5278 @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}} 5279} 5280 5281% Definition for writing index entry text. 5282\def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}% 5283 5284% Definition for writing index entry sort key. Should occur at the at 5285% the beginning of the index entry, like 5286% @cindex @sortas{september} \september 5287% The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way 5288% to remove space before it. 5289{ 5290\catcode`\-=13 5291\gdef\indexwritesortas{% 5292 \begingroup 5293 \indexnonalnumreappear 5294 \indexwritesortasxxx} 5295\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{% 5296 \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup} 5297} 5298 5299 5300% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file. 5301% 5302\def\dosubindwrite{% 5303 % Put the index entry in the margin if desired. 5304 \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else 5305 \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}% 5306 \fi 5307 % 5308 % Remember, we are within a group. 5309 \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage 5310 \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output 5311 % as is; and it will print as backslash. 5312 % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex. 5313 % 5314 % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all 5315 % font commands turned off. 5316 {\indexnofonts 5317 \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}% 5318 \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}% 5319 \let\{=\lbracechar 5320 \let\}=\rbracechar 5321 \indexnonalnumdisappear 5322 \xdef\indexsortkey{}% 5323 \let\sortas=\indexwritesortas 5324 \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% 5325 \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas 5326 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty 5327 \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}% 5328 \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi 5329 \fi 5330 }% 5331 % 5332 % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and 5333 % the original text, including any font commands. We write 5334 % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the 5335 % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s 5336 % sorted result. 5337 \edef\temp{% 5338 \write\writeto{% 5339 \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}% 5340 }% 5341 \temp 5342} 5343\newbox\dummybox % used above 5344 5345% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit: 5346% 5347% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it 5348% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting 5349% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the 5350% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that 5351% sequences like this: 5352% @end defun 5353% @tindex whatever 5354% @defun ... 5355% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the 5356% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of 5357% the previous defun. 5358% 5359% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We 5360% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. 5361% 5362% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. 5363% 5364% But wait, there is a catch there: 5365% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not 5366% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts 5367% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual 5368% representation of the skip. 5369% 5370% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that 5371% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter). 5372% 5373\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname} 5374% 5375\newskip\whatsitskip 5376\newcount\whatsitpenalty 5377% 5378% ..., ready, GO: 5379% 5380\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode 5381 #1% 5382 \else 5383 % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously. 5384 \whatsitskip = \lastskip 5385 \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}% 5386 \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty 5387 % 5388 % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a 5389 % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this 5390 % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a 5391 % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential 5392 % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed. 5393 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5394 \else 5395 \vskip-\whatsitskip 5396 \fi 5397 % 5398 #1% 5399 % 5400 \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro 5401 % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and 5402 % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want 5403 % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various 5404 % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any 5405 % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example: 5406 % @deffn deffn-whatever 5407 % @vindex index-whatever 5408 % Description. 5409 % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit 5410 % and the "Description." paragraph. 5411 \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi 5412 \else 5413 % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip, 5414 % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item 5415 % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak. 5416 \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip 5417 \fi 5418\fi} 5419 5420% The index entry written in the file actually looks like 5421% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} 5422% or 5423% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic} 5424% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files 5425% containing these kinds of lines: 5426% \initial {c} 5427% before the first topic whose initial is c 5428% \entry {topic}{pagelist} 5429% for a topic that is used without subtopics 5430% \primary {topic} 5431% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics 5432% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist} 5433% for each subtopic. 5434 5435% Define the user-accessible indexing commands 5436% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex. 5437 5438\def\findex {\fnindex} 5439\def\kindex {\kyindex} 5440\def\cindex {\cpindex} 5441\def\vindex {\vrindex} 5442\def\tindex {\tpindex} 5443\def\pindex {\pgindex} 5444 5445\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub} 5446{\obeylines % 5447\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup % 5448\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}} 5449 5450% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. 5451 5452% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. 5453% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). 5454% 5455\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup 5456 \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% 5457 % 5458 \smallfonts \rm 5459 \tolerance = 9500 5460 \plainfrenchspacing 5461 \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression. 5462 % 5463 % See if the index file exists and is nonempty. 5464 % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains 5465 % \initial {@} 5466 % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces 5467 % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). 5468 \catcode`\@ = 12 5469 % See comment in \requireopenindexfile. 5470 \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi 5471 \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s 5472 \ifeof 1 5473 % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, 5474 % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the 5475 % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure 5476 % there is some text. 5477 \putwordIndexNonexistent 5478 \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}% 5479 \else 5480 \catcode`\\ = 0 5481 % 5482 % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof 5483 % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so 5484 % it can discover if there is anything in it. 5485 \read 1 to \thisline 5486 \ifeof 1 5487 \putwordIndexIsEmpty 5488 \else 5489 % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape 5490 % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change 5491 % to make right now. 5492 \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}% 5493 \let\indexlbrace\{ % Likewise, set these sequences for braces 5494 \let\indexrbrace\} % used in the sort key. 5495 \begindoublecolumns 5496 \let\dotheinsertentrybox\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty 5497 % 5498 % Read input from the index file line by line. 5499 \loopdo 5500 \ifeof1 \else 5501 \read 1 to \nextline 5502 \fi 5503 % 5504 \indexinputprocessing 5505 \thisline 5506 % 5507 \ifeof1\else 5508 \let\thisline\nextline 5509 \repeat 5510 %% 5511 \enddoublecolumns 5512 \fi 5513 \fi 5514 \closein 1 5515\endgroup} 5516\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx} 5517\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next} 5518 5519\def\indexinputprocessing{% 5520 \ifeof1 5521 \let\firsttoken\relax 5522 \else 5523 \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}% 5524 \act 5525 \fi 5526} 5527\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken} 5528\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1} 5529 5530 5531% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. 5532% Change them to control the appearance of the index. 5533 5534{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13 5535\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13 5536\catcode`\$=3 5537\gdef\initialglyphs{% 5538 % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters. Using the glyphs from the 5539 % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere 5540 % for these characters. 5541 \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}% 5542 \let\\=\indexbackslash 5543 % 5544 % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash 5545 \catcode`\/=13 5546 \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}% 5547 \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--' 5548 \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}% 5549 \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}% 5550 \def\_{% 5551 \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }% 5552 \def|{$\vert$}% 5553 \def<{$\less$}% 5554 \def>{$\gtr$}% 5555 \def+{$\normalplus$}% 5556}} 5557 5558\def\initial{% 5559 \bgroup 5560 \initialglyphs 5561 \initialx 5562} 5563 5564\def\initialx#1{% 5565 % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. 5566 \removelastskip 5567 % 5568 % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. 5569 % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the 5570 % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing. 5571 \nobreak 5572 \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip 5573 \penalty -300 5574 \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip 5575 % 5576 % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of 5577 % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column 5578 % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch 5579 % we need before each entry, but it's better. 5580 % 5581 % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. 5582 \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip 5583 \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}% 5584 % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of 5585 % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that 5586 % \leftline creates. 5587 % Do our best not to break after the initial. 5588 \nobreak 5589 \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip 5590 \egroup % \initialglyphs 5591} 5592 5593\newdimen\entryrightmargin 5594\entryrightmargin=0pt 5595 5596% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and 5597% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index 5598% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. 5599% 5600\def\entry{% 5601 \begingroup 5602 % 5603 % For pdfTeX and XeTeX. 5604 % The redefinition of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to 5605 % preserve coloured links across page boundaries. Otherwise the marks 5606 % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertentrybox. 5607 \let\domark\relax 5608 % 5609 % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't 5610 % affect previous text. 5611 \par 5612 % 5613 % No extra space above this paragraph. 5614 \parskip = 0in 5615 % 5616 % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks 5617 % from @* into spaces. The user might give these in long section 5618 % titles, for instance. 5619 \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5620 \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command 5621 % 5622 % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter): 5623 \afterassignment\doentry 5624 \let\temp = 5625} 5626\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}% 5627\def\doentry{% 5628 % Save the text of the entry 5629 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup 5630 \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace. 5631 \noindent 5632 \aftergroup\finishentry 5633 % And now comes the text of the entry. 5634 % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems 5635 % with catcodes occurring. 5636} 5637{\catcode`\@=11 5638\gdef\finishentry#1{% 5639 \egroup % end box A 5640 \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry 5641 \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA 5642 % #1 is the page number. 5643 % 5644 % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use 5645 % leaders if they are present. 5646 \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}% 5647 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5648 \null\nobreak\hfill\ % 5649 \else 5650 % 5651 \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number. 5652 % 5653 \ifpdf 5654 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5655 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5656 \else 5657 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5658 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1% 5659 \else 5660 \pdfgettoks#1.% 5661 \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA 5662 \fi 5663 \fi 5664 \fi 5665 \egroup % end \boxA 5666 \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt 5667 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}% 5668 \else 5669 \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox\bgroup 5670 % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the 5671 % page numbers to be aligned to the right. 5672 % 5673 \parindent = 0pt 5674 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil 5675 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill 5676 \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil 5677 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill 5678 % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own 5679 % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right. 5680 \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill 5681 % 5682 \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin 5683 % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin. 5684 % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H GNU Free Documentation License" to 5685 % fit on one line in @letterpaper format. 5686 \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em 5687 \dimen@i=2.1em 5688 \else 5689 \dimen@i=0em 5690 \fi 5691 \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i 5692 % 5693 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5694 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip 5695 \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin 5696 \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i 5697 \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line 5698 \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii % due to long index text 5699 \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@ % Try to split the text roughly evenly 5700 \dimen@ii = \hsize 5701 \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii 5702 % If the entry is too long, use the whole line 5703 \dimen@ = \dimen@ii 5704 \fi 5705 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right 5706 \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip 5707 \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii 5708 % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only, 5709 % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX 5710 % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing. 5711 % 5712 \leftskip = 1em 5713 \parindent = -1em 5714 \fi\fi 5715 \indent % start paragraph 5716 \unhbox\boxA 5717 % 5718 % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines. 5719 \finalhyphendemerits = 0 5720 % 5721 % Word spacing - no stretch 5722 \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font 5723 % 5724 \linepenalty=1000 % Discourage line breaks. 5725 \hyphenpenalty=5000 % Discourage hyphenation. 5726 % 5727 \par % format the paragraph 5728 \egroup % The \vbox 5729 \fi 5730 \endgroup 5731 \dotheinsertentrybox 5732}} 5733 5734\newskip\thinshrinkable 5735\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em 5736 5737\newbox\entrybox 5738\def\insertentrybox{% 5739 \ourunvbox\entrybox 5740} 5741 5742% default definition 5743\let\dotheinsertentrybox\insertentrybox 5744 5745% Use \lastbox to take apart vbox box by box, and add each sub-box 5746% to the current vertical list. 5747\def\ourunvbox#1{% 5748\bgroup % for local binding of \delayedbox 5749 % Remove the last box from box #1 5750 \global\setbox#1=\vbox{% 5751 \unvbox#1% 5752 \unskip % remove any glue 5753 \unpenalty 5754 \global\setbox\interbox=\lastbox 5755 }% 5756 \setbox\delayedbox=\box\interbox 5757 \ifdim\ht#1=0pt\else 5758 \ourunvbox#1 % Repeat on what's left of the box 5759 \nobreak 5760 \fi 5761 \box\delayedbox 5762\egroup 5763} 5764\newbox\delayedbox 5765\newbox\interbox 5766 5767% Used from \printindex. \firsttoken should be the first token 5768% after the \entry. If it's not another \entry, we are at the last 5769% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage 5770% widowed index entries. 5771\def\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty{% 5772 \ifx\firsttoken\isentry 5773 \else 5774 \penalty 9000 5775 \fi 5776 \insertentrybox 5777} 5778\def\isentry{\entry}% 5779 5780% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em. 5781% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push 5782% the page number to the right. 5783\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders 5784 \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll} 5785 5786 5787\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}} 5788 5789\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm 5790\def\secondary#1#2{{% 5791 \parfillskip=0in 5792 \parskip=0in 5793 \hangindent=1in 5794 \hangafter=1 5795 \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill 5796 \ifpdf 5797 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5798 \else 5799 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 5800 #2 5801 \else 5802 \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph. 5803 \fi 5804 \fi 5805 \par 5806}} 5807 5808% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. 5809% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, 5810% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. 5811\catcode`\@=11 % private names 5812 5813\newbox\partialpage 5814\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize 5815 5816% Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark 5817\def\savemarks{% 5818 \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark }% 5819 \global\savedfirstmark=\expandafter{\firstmark }% 5820} 5821\newtoks\savedtopmark 5822\newtoks\savedfirstmark 5823 5824% Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs. 5825% Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material 5826% added while an output routine is active, including 5827% penalties, is saved for after it finishes). The page so far 5828% should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away. 5829\def\restoremarks{% 5830 \mark{\the\savedtopmark}% 5831 \bgroup\output = {% 5832 \setbox\dummybox=\box\PAGE 5833 }abc\eject\egroup 5834 % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page. 5835 \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}% 5836} 5837 5838\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns 5839 % If not much space left on page, start a new page. 5840 \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi 5841 % 5842 % Grab any single-column material above us. 5843 \output = {% 5844 % 5845 % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a 5846 % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output 5847 % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is 5848 % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In 5849 % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal 5850 % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this 5851 % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case. 5852 \ifvoid\partialpage \else 5853 \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}% 5854 \fi 5855 % 5856 \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% 5857 % Unvbox the main output page. 5858 \unvbox\PAGE 5859 \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip 5860 }% 5861 \savemarks 5862 }% 5863 \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage 5864 \restoremarks 5865 % 5866 % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order 5867 % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading, 5868 % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output. 5869 % 5870 % 5871 % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. 5872 \output = {\doublecolumnout}% 5873 % 5874 % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this 5875 % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 5876 % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple 5877 % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the 5878 % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. 5879 % 5880 % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between 5881 % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it 5882 % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant 5883 % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) 5884 % as it did when we hard-coded it. 5885 % 5886 % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we 5887 % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) 5888 % been clobbered. 5889 % 5890 \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize 5891 \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize 5892 \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2 5893 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5894 % 5895 % Double the \vsize as well. 5896 \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage 5897 \vsize = 2\vsize 5898 % 5899 % For the benefit of balancing columns 5900 \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt 5901} 5902 5903% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except 5904% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns. 5905% 5906\def\doublecolumnout{% 5907 % 5908 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth 5909 % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal 5910 % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the 5911 % previous page. 5912 \dimen@ = \vsize 5913 \divide\dimen@ by 2 5914 % 5915 % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. 5916 \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ 5917 \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage 5918 \onepageout\pagesofar 5919 \unvbox\PAGE 5920 \penalty\outputpenalty 5921} 5922% 5923% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, 5924% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. 5925\def\pagesofar{% 5926 \unvbox\partialpage 5927 % 5928 \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize 5929 \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize 5930 \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% 5931} 5932 5933 5934% Finished with with double columns. 5935\def\enddoublecolumns{% 5936 % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised 5937 % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the 5938 % following situation: 5939 % 5940 % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry. 5941 % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no 5942 % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last 5943 % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not 5944 % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following 5945 % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject 5946 % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output 5947 % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last 5948 % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which 5949 % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with 5950 % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as 5951 % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page 5952 % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the 5953 % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page 5954 % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final 5955 % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after 5956 % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns 5957 % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see 5958 % \pagebody), causing an overfull box. 5959 % 5960 % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the 5961 % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281). 5962 \penalty0 5963 % 5964 \output = {% 5965 % Split the last of the double-column material. 5966 \savemarks 5967 \balancecolumns 5968 % 5969 % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not 5970 % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal 5971 % definition right away. 5972 \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% 5973 }% 5974 \eject 5975 \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns 5976 \restoremarks 5977 % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic 5978 % page break. 5979 \box\balancedcolumns 5980 % 5981 % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted 5982 % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column 5983 % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize. 5984 \global\vsize = \txipageheight % 5985 \pagegoal = \txipageheight % 5986} 5987\newbox\balancedcolumns 5988\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}% 5989% 5990% Only called for the last of the double column material. \doublecolumnout 5991% does the others. 5992\def\balancecolumns{% 5993 \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. 5994 \dimen@ = \ht0 5995 \advance\dimen@ by \topskip 5996 \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip 5997 \ifdim\dimen@<5\baselineskip 5998 % Don't split a short final column in two. 5999 \setbox2=\vbox{}% 6000 \else 6001 \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to 6002 \dimen@ii = \dimen@ 6003 \splittopskip = \topskip 6004 % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column. 6005 {% 6006 \vbadness = 10000 6007 \loop 6008 \global\setbox3 = \copy0 6009 \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ 6010 \ifdim\ht1<\ht3 6011 \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt 6012 \repeat 6013 }% 6014 % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3. 6015 % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself. 6016 % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so 6017 % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize). 6018 \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize 6019 % Just split the last of the double column material roughly in half. 6020 \setbox2=\box0 6021 \setbox0 = \vsplit2 to \dimen@ii 6022 \setbox0=\vbox to \dimen@ii {\unvbox0\vfill}% 6023 \setbox2=\vbox to \dimen@ii {\unvbox2\vfill}% 6024 \else 6025 % Compare the heights of the two columns. 6026 \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3 6027 % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms 6028 % flush with each other. 6029 \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}% 6030 \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}% 6031 \else 6032 % Make column bottoms flush with each other. 6033 \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}% 6034 \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}% 6035 \fi 6036 \fi 6037 \fi 6038 % 6039 \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}% 6040} 6041\catcode`\@ = \other 6042 6043 6044\message{sectioning,} 6045% Chapters, sections, etc. 6046 6047% Let's start with @part. 6048\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}} 6049\def\partzzz#1{% 6050 \chapoddpage 6051 \null 6052 \vskip.3\vsize % move it down on the page a bit 6053 \begingroup 6054 \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text 6055 \let\lastnode=\empty % no node to associate with 6056 \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc 6057 \headingsoff % no headline or footline on the part page 6058 % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter 6059 % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents. 6060 \let\pchapsepmacro\relax 6061 \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6062 \chapoddpage 6063 \endgroup 6064} 6065 6066% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron. But we count the unnumbered 6067% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf 6068% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter 6069% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000 6070% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.) 6071\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000 6072\newcount\chapno 6073\newcount\secno \secno=0 6074\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 6075\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 6076 6077% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... 6078\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ 6079% 6080% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} 6081% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple 6082% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual 6083% letter in the expansion, not just typeset. 6084% 6085\def\appendixletter{% 6086 \ifnum\appendixno=`A A% 6087 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B% 6088 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C% 6089 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D% 6090 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E% 6091 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F% 6092 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G% 6093 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H% 6094 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I% 6095 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J% 6096 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K% 6097 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L% 6098 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M% 6099 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N% 6100 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O% 6101 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P% 6102 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q% 6103 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R% 6104 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S% 6105 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T% 6106 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U% 6107 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V% 6108 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W% 6109 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X% 6110 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y% 6111 \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z% 6112 % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is 6113 % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not 6114 % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out 6115 % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it. 6116 \else\char\the\appendixno 6117 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 6118 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} 6119 6120% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number 6121% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use 6122% these. @section does likewise. 6123\def\thischapter{} 6124\def\thischapternum{} 6125\def\thischaptername{} 6126\def\thissection{} 6127\def\thissectionnum{} 6128\def\thissectionname{} 6129 6130\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level 6131\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count 6132 6133% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc. 6134\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1} 6135\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name 6136 6137% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc. 6138\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1} 6139\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name 6140 6141% we only have subsub. 6142\chardef\maxseclevel = 3 6143% 6144% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too. 6145% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in: 6146\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel 6147% 6148% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not: 6149% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored. 6150\def\chapheadtype{N} 6151 6152% Choose a heading macro 6153% #1 is heading type 6154% #2 is heading level 6155% #3 is text for heading 6156\def\genhead#1#2#3{% 6157 % Compute the abs. sec. level: 6158 \absseclevel=#2 6159 \advance\absseclevel by \secbase 6160 % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range: 6161 \ifnum \absseclevel < 0 6162 \absseclevel = 0 6163 \else 6164 \ifnum \absseclevel > 3 6165 \absseclevel = 3 6166 \fi 6167 \fi 6168 % The heading type: 6169 \def\headtype{#1}% 6170 \if \headtype U% 6171 \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel 6172 \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel 6173 \fi 6174 \else 6175 % Check for appendix sections: 6176 \ifnum \absseclevel = 0 6177 \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}% 6178 \else 6179 \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N% 6180 \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}% 6181 \fi\fi 6182 \fi 6183 % Check for numbered within unnumbered: 6184 \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel 6185 \def\headtype{U}% 6186 \else 6187 \chardef\unnlevel = 3 6188 \fi 6189 \fi 6190 % Now print the heading: 6191 \if \headtype U% 6192 \ifcase\absseclevel 6193 \unnumberedzzz{#3}% 6194 \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}% 6195 \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6196 \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6197 \fi 6198 \else 6199 \if \headtype A% 6200 \ifcase\absseclevel 6201 \appendixzzz{#3}% 6202 \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}% 6203 \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}% 6204 \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6205 \fi 6206 \else 6207 \ifcase\absseclevel 6208 \chapterzzz{#3}% 6209 \or \seczzz{#3}% 6210 \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}% 6211 \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}% 6212 \fi 6213 \fi 6214 \fi 6215 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6216} 6217 6218% an interface: 6219\def\numhead{\genhead N} 6220\def\apphead{\genhead A} 6221\def\unnmhead{\genhead U} 6222 6223% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset 6224% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero. 6225% 6226% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers 6227% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty. 6228\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6229% 6230\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz 6231\def\chapterzzz#1{% 6232 % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such 6233 % as an @include file. 6234 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6235 \global\advance\chapno by 1 6236 % 6237 % Used for \float. 6238 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}% 6239 \resetallfloatnos 6240 % 6241 % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations. 6242 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}% 6243 \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}% 6244 % 6245 % Write the actual heading. 6246 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}% 6247 % 6248 % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter. 6249 \global\let\section = \numberedsec 6250 \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6251 \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6252} 6253 6254\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz 6255% 6256\def\appendixzzz#1{% 6257 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6258 \global\advance\appendixno by 1 6259 \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}% 6260 \resetallfloatnos 6261 % 6262 % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations. 6263 \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}% 6264 \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}% 6265 % 6266 \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}% 6267 % 6268 \global\let\section = \appendixsec 6269 \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec 6270 \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec 6271} 6272 6273% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz: 6274\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} 6275\def\unnumberedzzz#1{% 6276 \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 6277 \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1 6278 % 6279 % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures. 6280 \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty 6281 \resetallfloatnos 6282 % 6283 % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the 6284 % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX 6285 % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX 6286 % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant 6287 % to be executed, not expanded). 6288 % 6289 % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear 6290 % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use 6291 % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, 6292 % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for 6293 % the toc entries.) 6294 \toks0 = {#1}% 6295 \message{(\the\toks0)}% 6296 % 6297 \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}% 6298 % 6299 \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec 6300 \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec 6301 \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec 6302} 6303 6304% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. 6305\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{% 6306 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters 6307 \unnmhead0{#1}% 6308 \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6309} 6310 6311% @top is like @unnumbered. 6312\let\top\unnumbered 6313 6314% Sections. 6315% 6316\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz 6317\def\seczzz#1{% 6318 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6319 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}% 6320} 6321 6322% normally calls appendixsectionzzz: 6323\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} 6324\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{% 6325 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6326 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}% 6327} 6328\let\appendixsec\appendixsection 6329 6330% normally calls unnumberedseczzz: 6331\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} 6332\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{% 6333 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1 6334 \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}% 6335} 6336 6337% Subsections. 6338% 6339% normally calls numberedsubseczzz: 6340\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} 6341\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{% 6342 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6343 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6344} 6345 6346% normally calls appendixsubseczzz: 6347\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} 6348\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{% 6349 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6350 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}% 6351 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6352} 6353 6354% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz: 6355\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} 6356\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{% 6357 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1 6358 \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}% 6359 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}% 6360} 6361 6362% Subsubsections. 6363% 6364% normally numberedsubsubseczzz: 6365\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} 6366\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6367 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6368 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}% 6369 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6370} 6371 6372% normally appendixsubsubseczzz: 6373\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} 6374\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{% 6375 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6376 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}% 6377 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6378} 6379 6380% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz: 6381\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} 6382\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{% 6383 \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1 6384 \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}% 6385 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}% 6386} 6387 6388% These macros control what the section commands do, according 6389% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered). 6390% Define them by default for a numbered chapter. 6391\let\section = \numberedsec 6392\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec 6393\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec 6394 6395% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading 6396 6397\def\majorheading{% 6398 {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }% 6399 \parsearg\chapheadingzzz 6400} 6401 6402\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz} 6403\def\chapheadingzzz#1{% 6404 \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}% 6405 \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak 6406 \suppressfirstparagraphindent 6407} 6408 6409% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. 6410\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6411 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6412\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6413 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6414\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{} 6415 \suppressfirstparagraphindent} 6416 6417% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only 6418% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), 6419% given all the information in convenient, parsed form. 6420 6421% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative) 6422\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi} 6423 6424% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) 6425\newskip\chapheadingskip 6426 6427% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it. 6428\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} 6429 6430% Start a new page 6431\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} 6432 6433% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter 6434% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will 6435% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't 6436% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page. 6437\def\chapoddpage{% 6438 \chappager 6439 \ifodd\pageno \else 6440 \begingroup 6441 \headingsoff 6442 \null 6443 \chappager 6444 \endgroup 6445 \fi 6446} 6447 6448\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} 6449 6450\def\CHAPPAGoff{% 6451\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6452\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak 6453\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} 6454 6455\def\CHAPPAGon{% 6456\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager 6457\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager 6458\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager 6459\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} 6460 6461\def\CHAPPAGodd{% 6462\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage 6463\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage 6464\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage 6465\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} 6466 6467\CHAPPAGon 6468 6469% \chapmacro - Chapter opening. 6470% 6471% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, 6472% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number. 6473% Not used for @heading series. 6474% 6475% To test against our argument. 6476\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing} 6477\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix} 6478\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc} 6479% 6480\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{% 6481 \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else 6482 \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment. 6483 \fi 6484 % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when 6485 % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but 6486 % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print 6487 % in chapter size. 6488 % 6489 % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6490 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6491 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6492 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6493 \gdef\thissection{}}% 6494 % 6495 \def\temptype{#2}% 6496 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6497 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6498 \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}% 6499 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6500 \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}% 6501 \gdef\thischapter{}}% 6502 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6503 \toks0={#1}% 6504 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6505 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6506 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}% 6507 % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible 6508 % commands in some of the translations. 6509 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{} 6510 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6511 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6512 }% 6513 \else 6514 \toks0={#1}% 6515 \xdef\lastchapterdefs{% 6516 \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}% 6517 \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}% 6518 % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible 6519 % commands in some of the translations. 6520 \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{} 6521 \noexpand\thischapternum: 6522 \noexpand\thischaptername}% 6523 }% 6524 \fi\fi\fi 6525 % 6526 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6527 % the preceding space. 6528 \safewhatsit\domark 6529 % 6530 % Insert the chapter heading break. 6531 \pchapsepmacro 6532 % 6533 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6534 % between here and the heading. 6535 \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs 6536 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6537 \domark 6538 % 6539 {% 6540 \chapfonts \rm 6541 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message 6542 % 6543 % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the 6544 % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called 6545 % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon. 6546 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6547 % 6548 % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix 6549 % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''. 6550 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6551 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6552 \def\toctype{unnchap}% 6553 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6554 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry 6555 \def\toctype{omit}% 6556 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6557 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}% 6558 \def\toctype{app}% 6559 \else 6560 \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}% 6561 \def\toctype{numchap}% 6562 \fi\fi\fi 6563 % 6564 % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the 6565 % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc 6566 % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty. 6567 \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}% 6568 % 6569 % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make 6570 % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has 6571 % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the 6572 % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not 6573 % being visible, for instance under high magnification. 6574 \donoderef{#2}% 6575 % 6576 % Typeset the actual heading. 6577 \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue. 6578 \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe 6579 \unhbox0 #1\par}% 6580 }% 6581 \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title 6582 \nobreak 6583} 6584 6585% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. 6586\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax 6587\def\centerparameters{% 6588 \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip 6589 \leftskip = \rightskip 6590 \parfillskip = 0pt 6591} 6592 6593 6594% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and 6595% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing. 6596% 6597\newskip\secheadingskip 6598\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}} 6599 6600% Subsection titles. 6601\newskip\subsecheadingskip 6602\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}} 6603 6604% Subsubsection titles. 6605\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip} 6606\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak} 6607 6608 6609% Print any size, any type, section title. 6610% 6611% #1 is the text of the title, 6612% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), 6613% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), 6614% #4 is the section number. 6615% 6616\def\seckeyword{sec} 6617% 6618\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{% 6619 {% 6620 \def\sectionlevel{#2}% 6621 \def\temptype{#3}% 6622 % 6623 % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an 6624 % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is 6625 % dubious), but not the others. 6626 \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else 6627 \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment. 6628 \fi 6629 \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading 6630 % 6631 % Switch to the right set of fonts. 6632 \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm 6633 % 6634 % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark). 6635 \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6636 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6637 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6638 \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}% 6639 \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}% 6640 \fi 6641 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6642 % Don't redefine \thissection. 6643 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6644 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6645 \toks0={#1}% 6646 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6647 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6648 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6649 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6650 % commands in some of the translations. 6651 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6652 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6653 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6654 }% 6655 \fi 6656 \else 6657 \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword 6658 \toks0={#1}% 6659 \xdef\lastsectiondefs{% 6660 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}% 6661 \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}% 6662 % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible 6663 % commands in some of the translations. 6664 \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{} 6665 \noexpand\thissectionnum: 6666 \noexpand\thissectionname}% 6667 }% 6668 \fi 6669 \fi\fi\fi 6670 % 6671 % Go into vertical mode. Usually we'll already be there, but we 6672 % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph 6673 % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line. 6674 \par 6675 % 6676 % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of 6677 % the preceding space. 6678 \safewhatsit\domark 6679 % 6680 % Insert space above the heading. 6681 \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname 6682 % 6683 % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points 6684 % between here and the heading. 6685 \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs 6686 \domark 6687 % 6688 % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number. 6689 \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword 6690 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6691 \def\toctype{unn}% 6692 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6693 \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword 6694 % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc, 6695 % and don't redefine \lastsection. 6696 \setbox0 = \hbox{}% 6697 \def\toctype{omit}% 6698 \let\sectionlevel=\empty 6699 \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword 6700 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6701 \def\toctype{app}% 6702 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6703 \else 6704 \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}% 6705 \def\toctype{num}% 6706 \gdef\lastsection{#1}% 6707 \fi\fi\fi 6708 % 6709 % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro. 6710 \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}% 6711 % 6712 % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex). 6713 % Again, see comments in \chapmacro. 6714 \donoderef{#3}% 6715 % 6716 % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed. 6717 % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be 6718 % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the 6719 % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that 6720 % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the 6721 % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000. 6722 \nobreak 6723 % 6724 % Output the actual section heading. 6725 \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright 6726 \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number 6727 \unhbox0 #1}% 6728 }% 6729 % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it. 6730 % Don't allow stretch, though. 6731 \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname 6732 % 6733 % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it 6734 % was followed by glue. 6735 \nobreak 6736 % 6737 % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that 6738 % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a 6739 % discardable item.) However, when a paragraph is not started next 6740 % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out 6741 % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically 6742 % obscuring the section heading with something else. 6743 \vskip-\parskip 6744 % 6745 % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known 6746 % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation 6747 % and do the needful. 6748 \penalty 10001 6749} 6750 6751 6752\message{toc,} 6753% Table of contents. 6754\newwrite\tocfile 6755 6756% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. 6757% Called from @chapter, etc. 6758% 6759% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno} 6760% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional 6761% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually 6762% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the 6763% destination to jump to. 6764% 6765% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or 6766% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document. 6767% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the 6768% table of contents chapter openings themselves. 6769% 6770\newif\iftocfileopened 6771\def\omitkeyword{omit}% 6772% 6773\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{% 6774 \edef\writetoctype{#1}% 6775 \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else 6776 \iftocfileopened\else 6777 \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc 6778 \global\tocfileopenedtrue 6779 \fi 6780 % 6781 \iflinks 6782 {\atdummies 6783 \edef\temp{% 6784 \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}% 6785 \temp 6786 }% 6787 \fi 6788 \fi 6789 % 6790 % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're 6791 % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't 6792 % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered 6793 % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first 6794 % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named 6795 % `1', and two named `2'. 6796 \ifpdf 6797 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6798 \else 6799 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 6800 \else 6801 \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue 6802 \fi 6803 \fi 6804} 6805 6806 6807% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman 6808% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant 6809% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file. 6810% 6811\def\activecatcodes{% 6812 \catcode`\"=\active 6813 \catcode`\$=\active 6814 \catcode`\<=\active 6815 \catcode`\>=\active 6816 \catcode`\\=\active 6817 \catcode`\^=\active 6818 \catcode`\_=\active 6819 \catcode`\|=\active 6820 \catcode`\~=\active 6821} 6822 6823 6824% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input. 6825\def\readtocfile{% 6826 \setupdatafile 6827 \activecatcodes 6828 \input \tocreadfilename 6829} 6830 6831\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in 6832\newcount\savepageno 6833\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 6834 6835% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile. 6836% 6837\def\startcontents#1{% 6838 % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should 6839 % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain 6840 % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. 6841 % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> 6842 \contentsalignmacro 6843 \immediate\closeout\tocfile 6844 % 6845 % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. 6846 % It is abundantly clear what they are. 6847 \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}% 6848 % 6849 \savepageno = \pageno 6850 \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. 6851 \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. 6852 \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. 6853 % 6854 % Roman numerals for page numbers. 6855 \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi 6856} 6857 6858% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on 6859% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined. 6860% 6861\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc} 6862 6863% Normal (long) toc. 6864% 6865\def\contents{% 6866 \startcontents{\putwordTOC}% 6867 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6868 \ifeof 1 \else 6869 \readtocfile 6870 \fi 6871 \vfill \eject 6872 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6873 \ifeof 1 \else 6874 \pdfmakeoutlines 6875 \fi 6876 \closein 1 6877 \endgroup 6878 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6879 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6880} 6881 6882% And just the chapters. 6883\def\summarycontents{% 6884 \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}% 6885 % 6886 \let\partentry = \shortpartentry 6887 \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry 6888 \let\appentry = \shortchapentry 6889 \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry 6890 % We want a true roman here for the page numbers. 6891 \secfonts 6892 \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf 6893 \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt 6894 \rm 6895 \hyphenpenalty = 10000 6896 \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. 6897 \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{} 6898 \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry 6899 \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry 6900 \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6901 \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6902 \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6903 \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6904 \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6905 \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry 6906 \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space 6907 \ifeof 1 \else 6908 \readtocfile 6909 \fi 6910 \closein 1 6911 \vfill \eject 6912 \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect 6913 \endgroup 6914 \lastnegativepageno = \pageno 6915 \global\pageno = \savepageno 6916} 6917\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents 6918 6919% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents. 6920% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter. 6921% 6922\def\shortchaplabel#1{% 6923 % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the 6924 % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. 6925 % But use \hss just in case. 6926 % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after 6927 % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) 6928 % 6929 % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange 6930 % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and 6931 % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10 6932 % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters 6933 % there are before deciding ... 6934 \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}% 6935} 6936 6937% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents. 6938% The first argument is the chapter or section name. 6939% The last argument is the page number. 6940% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ... 6941 6942% Parts, in the main contents. Replace the part number, which doesn't 6943% exist, with an empty box. Let's hope all the numbers have the same width. 6944% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed. 6945\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}} 6946\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}} 6947% 6948% Parts, in the short toc. 6949\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{% 6950 \penalty-300 6951 \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip 6952 \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}% 6953} 6954 6955% Chapters, in the main contents. 6956\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6957 6958% Chapters, in the short toc. 6959% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings. 6960\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{% 6961 \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}% 6962} 6963 6964% Appendices, in the main contents. 6965% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box. 6966% 6967\def\appendixbox#1{% 6968 % We use M since it's probably the widest letter. 6969 \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}% 6970 \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}} 6971% 6972\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}} 6973 6974% Unnumbered chapters. 6975\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}} 6976\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}} 6977 6978% Sections. 6979\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6980\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry 6981\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}} 6982 6983% Subsections. 6984\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6985\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry 6986\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6987 6988% And subsubsections. 6989\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}} 6990\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry 6991\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}} 6992 6993% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. 6994% Same as \defaultparindent. 6995\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt 6996 6997% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the 6998% page number. 6999% 7000% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters 7001% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. 7002\def\dochapentry#1#2{% 7003 \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip 7004 \begingroup 7005 % Move the page numbers slightly to the right 7006 \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em 7007 \chapentryfonts 7008 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7009 \endgroup 7010 \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip 7011} 7012 7013\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7014 \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent 7015 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7016\endgroup} 7017 7018\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7019 \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent 7020 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7021\endgroup} 7022 7023\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup 7024 \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent 7025 \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}% 7026\endgroup} 7027 7028% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries. 7029\let\tocentry = \entry 7030 7031% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title. 7032\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax} 7033 7034\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7035\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}} 7036 7037\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm} 7038\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts} 7039\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7040\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts} 7041 7042 7043\message{environments,} 7044% @foo ... @end foo. 7045 7046% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw TeX temporarily. 7047% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works. 7048% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character. 7049 7050\envdef\tex{% 7051 \setupmarkupstyle{tex}% 7052 \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 7053 \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 7054 \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie 7055 \catcode `\%=14 7056 \catcode `\+=\other 7057 \catcode `\"=\other 7058 \catcode `\|=\other 7059 \catcode `\<=\other 7060 \catcode `\>=\other 7061 \catcode `\`=\other 7062 \catcode `\'=\other 7063 % 7064 % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000). So reset it, and all our 7065 % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions. 7066 \mathactive 7067 % 7068 % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file. 7069 \let\b=\ptexb 7070 \let\bullet=\ptexbullet 7071 \let\c=\ptexc 7072 \let\,=\ptexcomma 7073 \let\.=\ptexdot 7074 \let\dots=\ptexdots 7075 \let\equiv=\ptexequiv 7076 \let\!=\ptexexclam 7077 \let\i=\ptexi 7078 \let\indent=\ptexindent 7079 \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent 7080 \let\{=\ptexlbrace 7081 \let\+=\tabalign 7082 \let\}=\ptexrbrace 7083 \let\/=\ptexslash 7084 \let\sp=\ptexsp 7085 \let\*=\ptexstar 7086 %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode 7087 \let\t=\ptext 7088 \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % we've made it outer 7089 \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing 7090 % 7091 \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% 7092 \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% 7093 \def\@{@}% 7094} 7095% There is no need to define \Etex. 7096 7097% Define @lisp ... @end lisp. 7098% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things, 7099% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous). 7100 7101% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp. 7102\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in 7103 7104% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other 7105% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't 7106% have any width. 7107\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf} 7108 7109% This space is always present above and below environments. 7110\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt 7111 7112% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here 7113% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip 7114% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the 7115% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip. 7116% 7117\def\aboveenvbreak{{% 7118 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7119 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7120 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7121 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7122 \endgraf 7123 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7124 \removelastskip 7125 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7126 % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text 7127 % often leads into it. 7128 \penalty100 7129 \fi 7130 \vskip\envskipamount 7131 \fi 7132 \fi 7133}} 7134 7135\def\afterenvbreak{{% 7136 % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and 7137 % \sectionheading, q.v. 7138 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else 7139 \advance\envskipamount by \parskip 7140 \endgraf 7141 \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount 7142 \removelastskip 7143 % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak 7144 % or better ... 7145 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi 7146 \vskip\envskipamount 7147 \fi 7148 \fi 7149}} 7150 7151% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will 7152% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again. 7153\let\nonarrowing=\relax 7154 7155% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around 7156% environment contents. 7157\font\circle=lcircle10 7158\newdimen\circthick 7159\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner 7160\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip 7161\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle 7162% 7163\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth 7164\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}} 7165\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} 7166\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} 7167\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7168 \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr 7169 \hskip\rskip}} 7170\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip 7171 \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr 7172 \hskip\rskip}} 7173% 7174\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip 7175 7176\envdef\cartouche{% 7177 \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph. 7178 \startsavinginserts 7179 \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip 7180 \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*. 7181 \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip 7182 \advance\cartinner by-\rskip 7183 \cartouter=\hsize 7184 \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either 7185 % side, and for 6pt waste from 7186 % each corner char, and rule thickness 7187 \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip 7188 % 7189 % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the 7190 % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can 7191 % collide with the section heading. 7192 \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi 7193 % 7194 \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup 7195 \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt 7196 \carttop 7197 \hbox\bgroup 7198 \hskip\lskip 7199 \vrule\kern3pt 7200 \vbox\bgroup 7201 \kern3pt 7202 \hsize=\cartinner 7203 \baselineskip=\normbskip 7204 \lineskip=\normlskip 7205 \parskip=\normpskip 7206 \vskip -\parskip 7207 \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group. 7208} 7209\def\Ecartouche{% 7210 \ifhmode\par\fi 7211 \kern3pt 7212 \egroup 7213 \kern3pt\vrule 7214 \hskip\rskip 7215 \egroup 7216 \cartbot 7217 \egroup 7218 \addgroupbox 7219 \checkinserts 7220} 7221 7222 7223% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants, 7224% inside a group. 7225\newdimen\nonfillparindent 7226\def\nonfillstart{% 7227 \aboveenvbreak 7228 \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy 7229 \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens. 7230 \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines 7231 \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output 7232 \parskip = 0pt 7233 % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate 7234 % the normal \indent. 7235 \nonfillparindent=\parindent 7236 \parindent = 0pt 7237 \let\indent\nonfillindent 7238 % 7239 \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes 7240 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7241 \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7242 \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing 7243 \else 7244 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7245 \fi 7246 \let\exdent=\nofillexdent 7247} 7248 7249\begingroup 7250\obeyspaces 7251% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake 7252% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally 7253% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after 7254% @indent. 7255\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}% 7256\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{% 7257\ifx\temp % 7258\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble% 7259\else% 7260\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox% 7261\fi% 7262}% 7263\endgroup 7264\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent} 7265\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}} 7266 7267% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small. 7268% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall. 7269% This affects the following displayed environments: 7270% @example, @display, @format, @lisp 7271% 7272\def\smallword{small} 7273\def\nosmallword{nosmall} 7274\let\SETdispenvsize\relax 7275\def\setnormaldispenv{% 7276 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword 7277 % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank 7278 % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but 7279 % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient 7280 % to change the fonts afterward. 7281 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7282 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7283 \fi 7284} 7285\def\setsmalldispenv{% 7286 \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword 7287 \else 7288 \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi 7289 \smallexamplefonts \rm 7290 \fi 7291} 7292 7293% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo. 7294% Let's do it in one command. #1 is the env name, #2 the definition. 7295\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{% 7296 \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}% 7297 \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}% 7298 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7299 \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak 7300} 7301 7302% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment. 7303\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{% 7304 \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}% 7305 \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}% 7306} 7307% 7308% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; 7309% @example: same as @lisp. 7310% 7311% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts. 7312% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. 7313% 7314\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{% 7315 \nonfillstart 7316 \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}% 7317 \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. 7318 \gobble % eat return 7319} 7320% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font. 7321% 7322\makedispenvdef{display}{% 7323 \nonfillstart 7324 \gobble 7325} 7326 7327% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins. 7328% 7329\makedispenvdef{format}{% 7330 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7331 \nonfillstart 7332 \gobble 7333} 7334 7335% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize. 7336\envdef\flushleft{% 7337 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7338 \nonfillstart 7339 \gobble 7340} 7341\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak 7342 7343% @flushright. 7344% 7345\envdef\flushright{% 7346 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7347 \nonfillstart 7348 \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax 7349 \gobble 7350} 7351\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak 7352 7353 7354% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right 7355% justification. From plain.tex. Don't stretch around special 7356% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right 7357% should be enough. 7358\envdef\raggedright{% 7359 \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax 7360 \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}% 7361 \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}% 7362} 7363\let\Eraggedright\par 7364 7365\envdef\raggedleft{% 7366 \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em 7367 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7368 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7369 % badness reporting. 7370} 7371\let\Eraggedleft\par 7372 7373\envdef\raggedcenter{% 7374 \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em 7375 \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt 7376 \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off 7377 % badness reporting. 7378} 7379\let\Eraggedcenter\par 7380 7381 7382% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) 7383% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since 7384% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and 7385% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0. 7386% 7387\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart} 7388% 7389\def\quotationstart{% 7390 \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too. 7391 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7392 \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing 7393 \fi 7394 \parsearg\quotationlabel 7395} 7396 7397% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're 7398% doing normal filling. 7399% 7400\def\Equotation{% 7401 \par 7402 \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else 7403 % indent a bit. 7404 \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}% 7405 \fi 7406 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7407} 7408\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation} 7409 7410% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after. 7411\def\quotationlabel#1{% 7412 \def\temp{#1}% 7413 \ifx\temp\empty \else 7414 {\bf #1: }% 7415 \fi 7416} 7417 7418% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and 7419% has no optional argument. 7420% 7421\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart} 7422% 7423\def\indentedblockstart{% 7424 {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip 7425 \parindent=0pt 7426 % 7427 % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down. 7428 \ifx\nonarrowing\relax 7429 \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing 7430 \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing 7431 \else 7432 \let\nonarrowing = \relax 7433 \fi 7434} 7435 7436% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling. 7437% 7438\def\Eindentedblock{% 7439 \par 7440 {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}% 7441} 7442\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock} 7443 7444 7445% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>} 7446% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter, 7447% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg: 7448% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org 7449% 7450% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook. 7451% 7452% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets 7453% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a 7454% verbatim line. 7455\def\dospecials{% 7456 \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&% 7457 \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~% 7458 \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"% 7459 % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and 7460 % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and 7461 % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled. 7462 %\do\`\do\'% 7463} 7464% 7465% [Knuth] p. 380 7466\def\uncatcodespecials{% 7467 \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials} 7468% 7469% Setup for the @verb command. 7470% 7471% Eight spaces for a tab 7472\begingroup 7473 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7474 \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }} 7475\endgroup 7476% 7477\def\setupverb{% 7478 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7479 \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}% 7480 \setupmarkupstyle{verb}% 7481 \tabeightspaces 7482 % Respect line breaks, 7483 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7484 % make each space count 7485 % must do in this order: 7486 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7487} 7488 7489% Setup for the @verbatim environment 7490% 7491% Real tab expansion. 7492\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount 7493% 7494% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle 7495% tabs. The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent, 7496% or some other command that starts with a begin-group. Otherwise, the 7497% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before 7498% it is typeset. Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands 7499% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself. 7500\newbox\verbbox 7501\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup} 7502% 7503\begingroup 7504 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7505 \gdef\tabexpand{% 7506 \catcode`\^^I=\active 7507 \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup 7508 \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab 7509 \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw 7510 \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw 7511 \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw 7512 \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox 7513 }% 7514 } 7515\endgroup 7516 7517% start the verbatim environment. 7518\def\setupverbatim{% 7519 \let\nonarrowing = t% 7520 \nonfillstart 7521 \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim 7522 % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines. Otherwise, we would 7523 % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode. 7524 \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}% 7525 \tabexpand 7526 \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}% 7527 % Respect line breaks, 7528 % print special symbols as themselves, and 7529 % make each space count. 7530 % Must do in this order: 7531 \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces 7532 \everypar{\starttabbox}% 7533} 7534 7535% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique 7536% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a 7537% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace: 7538% 7539% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1} 7540% 7541% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {} 7542\begingroup 7543 \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other 7544 \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next] 7545\endgroup 7546% 7547\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb} 7548% 7549% 7550% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that 7551% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie: 7552% 7553% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1} 7554% 7555% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX, 7556% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}': 7557% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'. 7558% 7559% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx] 7560% 7561\begingroup 7562 \catcode`\ =\active 7563 \obeylines % 7564 % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end 7565 % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank 7566 % line in the output. 7567 \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}% 7568 % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but 7569 % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble. 7570\endgroup 7571% 7572\envdef\verbatim{% 7573 \setupverbatim\doverbatim 7574} 7575\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak 7576 7577 7578% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment. 7579% 7580\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude} 7581% 7582\def\doverbatiminclude#1{% 7583 {% 7584 \makevalueexpandable 7585 \setupverbatim 7586 \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names. 7587 \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}% 7588 \input #1 7589 \afterenvbreak 7590 }% 7591} 7592 7593% @copying ... @end copying. 7594% Save the text away for @insertcopying later. 7595% 7596% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box. 7597% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the 7598% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done 7599% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source 7600% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as 7601% possible is desirable. 7602% 7603\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying} 7604\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}} 7605% 7606\def\insertcopying{% 7607 \begingroup 7608 \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page 7609 \scanexp\copyingtext 7610 \endgroup 7611} 7612 7613 7614\message{defuns,} 7615% @defun etc. 7616 7617\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in 7618\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt 7619\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt 7620\newcount\defunpenalty 7621 7622% Start the processing of @deffn: 7623\def\startdefun{% 7624 \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 7625 \medbreak 7626 \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the 7627 % following @def command, see below. 7628 \else 7629 % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak, 7630 % which is there to keep the function description together with its 7631 % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a 7632 % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted 7633 % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning 7634 % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow 7635 % a break between a section heading and a defun. 7636 % 7637 % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling 7638 % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the 7639 % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following 7640 % @def command. 7641 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7642 % 7643 % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break. 7644 % But do insert the glue. 7645 \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint 7646 \fi 7647 % 7648 \parindent=0in 7649 \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent 7650 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7651} 7652 7653\def\dodefunx#1{% 7654 % First, check whether we are in the right environment: 7655 \checkenv#1% 7656 % 7657 % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row. 7658 % It's not a great place, though. 7659 \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi 7660 % 7661 % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun: 7662 \expandafter\gobbledefun#1% 7663} 7664\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{} 7665 7666% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text} 7667% 7668\def\printdefunline#1#2{% 7669 \begingroup 7670 % call \deffnheader: 7671 #1#2 \endheader 7672 % common ending: 7673 \interlinepenalty = 10000 7674 \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax 7675 \endgraf 7676 \nobreak\vskip -\parskip 7677 \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx 7678 % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses, 7679 % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize. 7680 \checkparencounts 7681 \endgroup 7682} 7683 7684\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak} 7685 7686% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn; 7687% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader. 7688% 7689\def\makedefun#1{% 7690 \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun 7691 \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun 7692 \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}% 7693 \temp 7694} 7695 7696% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) } 7697% 7698% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters. 7699% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly. 7700% 7701\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{% 7702 \envdef#1{% 7703 \startdefun 7704 \doingtypefnfalse % distinguish typed functions from all else 7705 \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}% 7706 }% 7707 \def#2{\dodefunx#1}% 7708 \def#3% 7709} 7710 7711\newif\ifdoingtypefn % doing typed function? 7712\newif\ifrettypeownline % typeset return type on its own line? 7713 7714% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions 7715% are printed on their own line. This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun, 7716% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod. 7717% 7718\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{% 7719 \def\temp{#1}% 7720 \ifx\temp\onword 7721 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7722 = \empty 7723 \else\ifx\temp\offword 7724 \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname 7725 = \relax 7726 \else 7727 \errhelp = \EMsimple 7728 \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp', 7729 must be on|off}% 7730 \fi\fi 7731} 7732 7733% Untyped functions: 7734 7735% @deffn category name args 7736\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}} 7737 7738% @deffn category class name args 7739\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7740 7741% \defopon {category on}class name args 7742\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7743 7744% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args 7745% 7746\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{% 7747 % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}. 7748 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}% 7749 \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}% 7750} 7751 7752% Typed functions: 7753 7754% @deftypefn category type name args 7755\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}} 7756 7757% @deftypeop category class type name args 7758\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}} 7759 7760% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args 7761\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7762 7763% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args 7764% 7765\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7766 \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7767 \doingtypefntrue 7768 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7769} 7770 7771% Typed variables: 7772 7773% @deftypevr category type var args 7774\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}} 7775 7776% @deftypecv category class type var args 7777\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7778 7779% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args 7780\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} } 7781 7782% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args 7783% 7784\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{% 7785 \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}% 7786 \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}% 7787} 7788 7789% Untyped variables: 7790 7791% @defvr category var args 7792\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} } 7793 7794% @defcv category class var args 7795\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}} 7796 7797% \defcvof {category of}class var args 7798\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} } 7799 7800% Types: 7801 7802% @deftp category name args 7803\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{% 7804 \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}% 7805 \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}% 7806} 7807 7808% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts: 7809\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7810\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} } 7811\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} } 7812\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} } 7813\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7814\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} } 7815\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} } 7816\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon} 7817\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon} 7818\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7819\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof} 7820 7821% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args). 7822% #1 is the category, such as "Function". 7823% #2 is the return type, if any. 7824% #3 is the function name. 7825% 7826% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any. 7827% 7828\def\defname#1#2#3{% 7829 \par 7830 % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def... 7831 \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent 7832 % 7833 % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function 7834 % on a line by itself. 7835 \rettypeownlinefalse 7836 \ifdoingtypefn % doing a typed function specifically? 7837 % then check user option for putting return type on its own line: 7838 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else 7839 \rettypeownlinetrue 7840 \fi 7841 \fi 7842 % 7843 % How we'll format the category name. Putting it in brackets helps 7844 % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line 7845 % just below it. 7846 \def\temp{#1}% 7847 \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi} 7848 % 7849 % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape. We'll always have at 7850 % least two. 7851 \tempnum = 2 7852 % 7853 % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero, 7854 % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it: 7855 \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip 7856 % 7857 % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line. 7858 \ifrettypeownline 7859 \advance\tempnum by 1 7860 \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}% 7861 \else 7862 \def\maybeshapeline{}% 7863 \fi 7864 % 7865 % The continuations: 7866 \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent 7867 % 7868 % The final paragraph shape: 7869 \parshape \tempnum 0in \dimen0 \maybeshapeline \defargsindent \dimen2 7870 % 7871 % Put the category name at the right margin. 7872 \noindent 7873 \hbox to 0pt{% 7874 \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize 7875 % \hsize has to be shortened this way: 7876 \kern\leftskip 7877 % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space. 7878 }% 7879 % 7880 % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint: 7881 \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 7882 \exdentamount=\defbodyindent 7883 {% 7884 % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because: 7885 % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle. 7886 % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's 7887 % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in 7888 % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm. 7889 % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures. 7890 % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no 7891 % one has made identifiers using them :). 7892 \df \tt 7893 \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type 7894 \ifx\temp\empty\else 7895 \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type 7896 \ifrettypeownline 7897 % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following: 7898 \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break 7899 \else 7900 \space % type on same line, so just followed by a space 7901 \fi 7902 \fi % no return type 7903 #3% output function name 7904 }% 7905 {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont 7906 % 7907 \boldbrax 7908 % arguments will be output next, if any. 7909} 7910 7911% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using 7912% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in 7913% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very 7914% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars. 7915% 7916\def\defunargs#1{% 7917 % use sl by default (not ttsl), 7918 % tt for the names. 7919 \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0 7920 % 7921 % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we 7922 % want a way to get ttsl. We used to recommend @var for that, so 7923 % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter. 7924 % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen 7925 % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny. @code also disables ?` !`. 7926 \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}% 7927 #1% 7928 \sl\hyphenchar\font=45 7929} 7930 7931% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line. 7932% 7933\def\activeparens{% 7934 \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active 7935 \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active 7936 \catcode`\&=\active 7937} 7938 7939% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars. 7940\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = ) 7941 7942% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example, 7943% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet, 7944% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence. 7945{ 7946 \activeparens 7947 \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen 7948 \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack 7949 \global\let& = \& 7950 7951 \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} 7952 \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm} 7953} 7954 7955\newcount\parencount 7956 7957% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards 7958\newif\ifampseen 7959\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }} 7960 7961\def\parenfont{% 7962 \ifampseen 7963 % At the first level, print parens in roman, 7964 % otherwise use the default font. 7965 \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi 7966 \else 7967 % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than 7968 % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] . 7969 \sf 7970 \fi 7971} 7972\def\infirstlevel#1{% 7973 \ifampseen 7974 \ifnum\parencount=1 7975 #1% 7976 \fi 7977 \fi 7978} 7979\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf} 7980 7981\def\opnr{% 7982 \global\advance\parencount by 1 7983 {\parenfont(}% 7984 \infirstlevel \bfafterword 7985} 7986\def\clnr{% 7987 {\parenfont)}% 7988 \infirstlevel \sl 7989 \global\advance\parencount by -1 7990} 7991 7992\newcount\brackcount 7993\def\lbrb{% 7994 \global\advance\brackcount by 1 7995 {\bf[}% 7996} 7997\def\rbrb{% 7998 {\bf]}% 7999 \global\advance\brackcount by -1 8000} 8001 8002\def\checkparencounts{% 8003 \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi 8004 \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi 8005} 8006% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually 8007% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers). 8008\def\badparencount{% 8009 \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}% 8010 \global\parencount=0 8011} 8012\def\badbrackcount{% 8013 \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}% 8014 \global\brackcount=0 8015} 8016 8017 8018\message{macros,} 8019% @macro. 8020 8021% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, 8022% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. 8023\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8024 \newwrite\macscribble 8025 \def\scantokens#1{% 8026 \toks0={#1}% 8027 \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp 8028 \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}% 8029 \immediate\closeout\macscribble 8030 \input \jobname.tmp 8031 } 8032\fi 8033 8034% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math 8035\let\texinfoc=\c 8036 8037\newcount\savedcatcodeone 8038\newcount\savedcatcodetwo 8039 8040% Used at the time of macro expansion. 8041% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted 8042\def\scanmacro#1{% 8043 \newlinechar`\^^M 8044 \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}% 8045 % 8046 % Temporarily undo catcode changes of \printindex. Set catcode of @ to 8047 % 0 so that @-commands in macro expansions aren't printed literally when 8048 % formatting an index file, where \ is used as the escape character. 8049 \savedcatcodeone=\catcode`\@ 8050 \savedcatcodetwo=\catcode`\\ 8051 \catcode`\@=0 8052 \catcode`\\=\active 8053 % 8054 % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime. 8055 \scantokens{#1@texinfoc}% 8056 % 8057 \catcode`\@=\savedcatcodeone 8058 \catcode`\\=\savedcatcodetwo 8059 % 8060 % The \texinfoc is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and 8061 % can be noticed by \parsearg. 8062 % We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup 8063 % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves. 8064} 8065 8066% Used for copying and captions 8067\def\scanexp#1{% 8068 \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}% 8069} 8070 8071\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters 8072\newtoks\macname % Macro name 8073\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? 8074 8075% List of all defined macros in the form 8076% \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2... 8077% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split 8078% if there is a need. 8079\def\macrolist{} 8080 8081% Add the macro to \macrolist 8082\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname} 8083\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{% 8084 \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}% 8085 \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}% 8086} 8087 8088% Utility routines. 8089% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is, 8090% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname 8091% (except of course we have to play expansion games). 8092% 8093\def\cslet#1#2{% 8094 \expandafter\let 8095 \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname 8096 \csname#2\endcsname 8097} 8098 8099% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. 8100% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). 8101{\catcode`\@=11 8102\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} 8103\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} 8104\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} 8105\def\unbrace#1{#1} 8106\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} 8107} 8108 8109% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. 8110{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3% 8111\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% 8112\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% 8113\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% 8114} 8115 8116% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where 8117% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active 8118% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \ 8119% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash. 8120% 8121% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate 8122% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to 8123% confine the change to the current group. 8124% 8125% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is 8126% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro 8127% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. 8128% 8129\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine 8130 \catcode`\"=\other 8131 \catcode`\+=\other 8132 \catcode`\<=\other 8133 \catcode`\>=\other 8134 \catcode`\^=\other 8135 \catcode`\_=\other 8136 \catcode`\|=\other 8137 \catcode`\~=\other 8138 \passthroughcharstrue 8139} 8140 8141\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros. 8142 \scanctxt 8143 \catcode`\@=\other 8144 \catcode`\\=\other 8145 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8146} 8147 8148\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions 8149 \scanctxt 8150 \catcode`\ =\other 8151 \catcode`\@=\other 8152 \catcode`\{=\other 8153 \catcode`\}=\other 8154 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8155 \usembodybackslash 8156} 8157 8158% Used when scanning braced macro arguments. Note, however, that catcode 8159% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside 8160% an argument to another Texinfo command. 8161\def\macroargctxt{% 8162 \scanctxt 8163 \catcode`\ =\active 8164 \catcode`\^^M=\other 8165 \catcode`\\=\active 8166} 8167 8168\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces 8169 \scanctxt 8170 \catcode`\{=\other 8171 \catcode`\}=\other 8172} 8173 8174% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. 8175% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N 8176% where N is the macro parameter number. 8177% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so 8178% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. 8179% 8180{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active 8181 @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} 8182 @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} 8183} 8184\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} 8185 8186\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 } 8187 8188\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} 8189\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} 8190 8191\def\macroxxx#1{% 8192 \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist 8193 \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments 8194 \paramno=0\relax 8195 \else 8196 \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% 8197 \if\paramno>256\relax 8198 \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined 8199 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8200 \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments} 8201 \fi 8202 \fi 8203 \fi 8204 \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname 8205 \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% 8206 \else 8207 \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax 8208 \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi 8209 \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% 8210 \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1% 8211 \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}% 8212 \fi 8213 \begingroup \macrobodyctxt 8214 \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody 8215 \else \expandafter\parsemacbody 8216 \fi} 8217 8218\parseargdef\unmacro{% 8219 \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname 8220 \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% 8221 \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0% 8222 % Remove the macro name from \macrolist: 8223 \begingroup 8224 \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax 8225 \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo 8226 \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}% 8227 \endgroup 8228 \else 8229 \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}% 8230 \fi 8231} 8232 8233% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any 8234% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax. 8235% 8236\def\unmacrodo#1{% 8237 \ifx #1\relax 8238 % remove this 8239 \else 8240 \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1% 8241 \fi 8242} 8243 8244% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line. Set \macname to 8245% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list. 8246\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} 8247\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} 8248\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} 8249\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} 8250% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a 8251% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by 8252% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. 8253 8254% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro. 8255% Set \paramno to the number of arguments, 8256% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a 8257% three-param macro.) Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params 8258% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded. If there are 8259% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N 8260% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be 8261% defined `a la TeX in the macro body. 8262% 8263% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). 8264% 8265% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see 8266% \parsemmanyargdef. 8267% 8268\def\parsemargdef#1;{% 8269 \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% 8270 \let\hash\relax 8271 % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions 8272 \let\xeatspaces\relax 8273 \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,% 8274 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else 8275 \paramno0\relax 8276 \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments 8277 \fi 8278} 8279\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% 8280 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8281 \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx 8282 \advance\paramno by 1 8283 \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname 8284 {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% 8285 \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% 8286 \fi\next} 8287 8288% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody 8289% 8290% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since 8291% rec and nonrec macros end differently.) 8292% 8293% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 8294% body to be transformed. 8295% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro. 8296% 8297{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{% 8298\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8299{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{% 8300\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}% 8301 8302% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names. 8303\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@} 8304\catcode `@=11\relax 8305 8306%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8307 8308% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the 8309% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is 8310% processed again to replace the arguments. 8311% 8312% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the 8313% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of 8314% the catcode regime under which the body was input). 8315% 8316% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more 8317% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error). 8318% 8319% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments 8320% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to 8321% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list 8322% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments 8323% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining 8324% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power. 8325\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{% 8326 \if#1;\let\next=\relax 8327 \else 8328 \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@ 8329 \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}% 8330 \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa 8331 \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}% 8332 % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we 8333 % don't want \the to be expanded in the \parsermacbody as it uses an 8334 % \xdef . 8335 \expandafter\edef\tempa 8336 {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}% 8337 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8338 \fi\next} 8339 8340 8341\let\endargs@\relax 8342\let\nil@\relax 8343\def\nilm@{\nil@}% 8344\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}% 8345 8346% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its 8347% definition. It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros 8348% macarg.ARGNAME 8349% 8350% #1 is the macro name 8351% #2 is the list of argument names 8352% #3 is the list of argument values 8353\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{% 8354 \def\macargdeflist@{}% 8355 \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion. 8356 \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}% 8357 \def\macroname{#1}% 8358 \begingroup 8359 \macroargctxt 8360 \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}% 8361 \def\@tempa{#3}% 8362 \ifx\@tempa\empty 8363 \setemptyargvalues@ 8364 \else 8365 \getargvals@@ 8366 \fi 8367} 8368\def\getargvals@@{% 8369 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8370 % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty. 8371 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8372 \else 8373 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8374 \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}% 8375 \fi 8376 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8377 \else 8378 \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@ 8379 % No more arguments values passed to macro. Set remaining named-arg 8380 % macros to empty. 8381 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8382 \else 8383 % pop current arg name into \@tempb 8384 \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}% 8385 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}% 8386 % pop current argument value into \@tempc 8387 \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}% 8388 \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}% 8389 % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value. 8390 % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd 8391 \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8392 \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax 8393 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{% 8394 \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}% 8395 \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}% 8396 \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@ 8397 \let\next\getargvals@@ 8398 \fi 8399 \fi 8400 \next 8401} 8402 8403\def\push@#1#2{% 8404 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def 8405 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2% 8406 \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{% 8407 \expandafter#1#2}% 8408} 8409 8410% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result 8411% in macro \@tempa. 8412% 8413\def\macvalstoargs@{% 8414 % To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed 8415 % within an \edef expand only once. So we are going to place all argument 8416 % values into respective token registers. 8417 % 8418 % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering. 8419 \begingroup 8420 \paramno0\relax 8421 % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument 8422 % value into a new token list register \toks#N 8423 \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,% 8424 % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their 8425 % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they 8426 % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef . 8427 \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}% 8428 % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers 8429 % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after 8430 % group. 8431 \expandafter 8432 \endgroup 8433 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}% 8434 } 8435 8436% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 8437% 8438\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 8439 \expandafter 8440 \endgroup 8441 \macargdeflist@ 8442 % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result 8443 % is in \@tempa . 8444 \macvalstoargs@ 8445 % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value 8446 % with \@tempb . 8447 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname 8448 % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing 8449 % \egroup . 8450 \ifx\@tempb\gobble 8451 \let\@tempc\relax 8452 \else 8453 \let\@tempc\egroup 8454 \fi 8455 % And now we do the real job: 8456 \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}% 8457 \@tempd 8458} 8459 8460\def\putargsintokens@#1,{% 8461 \if#1;\let\next\relax 8462 \else 8463 \let\next\putargsintokens@ 8464 % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary 8465 % alias \@tempb . 8466 \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno 8467 % Then we place the argument value into that token list register. 8468 \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname 8469 \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}% 8470 \advance\paramno by 1\relax 8471 \fi 8472 \next 8473} 8474 8475% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty. 8476% 8477\def\setemptyargvalues@{% 8478 \ifx\paramlist\nilm@ 8479 \let\next\macargexpandinbody@ 8480 \else 8481 \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@ 8482 \let\next\setemptyargvalues@ 8483 \fi 8484 \next 8485} 8486 8487\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{% 8488 \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{% 8489 \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}% 8490 \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@ 8491 \def\paramlist{#2}% 8492} 8493 8494% #1 is the element target macro 8495% #2 is the list macro 8496% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value 8497\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8498 \def#1{#3}% 8499 \def#2{#4}% 8500} 8501\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{% 8502 \long\def#1{#3}% 8503 \long\def#2{#4}% 8504} 8505 8506 8507%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8508 8509 8510% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody. 8511% \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for 8512% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}". 8513% \paramno is the number of parameters 8514% \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3," 8515% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments. 8516% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file 8517% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group. 8518% 8519\def\defmacro{% 8520 \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars 8521 \ifnum\paramno=1 8522 \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}% 8523 % This removes the pair of braces around the argument. We don't 8524 % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost 8525 % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based 8526 % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly. 8527 \else 8528 \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion 8529 \fi 8530 \ifcase\paramno 8531 % 0 8532 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8533 \bgroup 8534 \noexpand\spaceisspace 8535 \noexpand\endlineisspace 8536 \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name. 8537 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8538 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{% 8539 \egroup 8540 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8541 \or % 1 8542 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8543 \bgroup 8544 \noexpand\braceorline 8545 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}% 8546 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8547 \egroup 8548 \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}% 8549 }% 8550 \else % at most 9 8551 \ifnum\paramno<10\relax 8552 % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument 8553 % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 8554 % comma. 8555 % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list. 8556 % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted. 8557 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8558 \bgroup 8559 \noexpand\expandafter % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the 8560 \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space. 8561 \noexpand\expandafter 8562 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}% 8563 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{% 8564 \noexpand\passargtomacro 8565 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}% 8566 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{% 8567 \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}% 8568 \expandafter\expandafter 8569 \expandafter\xdef 8570 \expandafter\expandafter 8571 \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{% 8572 \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}% 8573 \else % 10 or more: 8574 \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% 8575 \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}% 8576 }% 8577 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody 8578 \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble 8579 \fi 8580 \fi} 8581 8582\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes 8583 8584\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} 8585 8586 8587%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8588% 8589{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13 % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape 8590@catcode`@_=11 % private names 8591@catcode`@!=11 % used as argument separator 8592 8593% \passargtomacro#1#2 - 8594% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2 8595% compressed to one. 8596% 8597% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 8598% \def or similar). This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 8599% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 8600% an auxiliary file for an index entry). 8601% 8602% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to 8603% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is 8604% 8605% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN (... rest of input) 8606% 8607% where: 8608% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call 8609% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro 8610% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing 8611% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next 8612 8613@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{% 8614 @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\% 8615} 8616@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax 8617 8618% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8619% #2 - PENDING_BS 8620% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8621% #4 used to look ahead 8622% 8623% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 8624% otherwise, remove the next token. 8625@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{% 8626 @ifx#4\% 8627 @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 8628 @else 8629 @expandafter@add_segment 8630 @fi#1!{#2}#4#4% 8631} 8632 8633% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8634% #2 - PENDING_BS 8635% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8636% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled. 8637% #5 looks ahead 8638% 8639% Double backslash found. Add a single backslash, and look ahead. 8640@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{% 8641 @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5% 8642} 8643 8644@gdef@is_fi{@fi} 8645 8646% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT 8647% #2 - PENDING_BS 8648% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN 8649% #4 is input stream until next backslash 8650% 8651% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 8652% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash. 8653% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 8654% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until 8655% the next backslash. PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent 8656% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been 8657% added to ARG_RESULT. 8658@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{% 8659@ifx#3@_finish 8660 @call_the_macro#1!% 8661@else 8662 % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment 8663 @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi 8664 % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead. 8665 % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 8666 % long #4 is. 8667} 8668 8669% #1 - THE_MACRO 8670% #2 - ARG_RESULT 8671% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 8672% conditional. 8673@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}} 8674 8675} 8676%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% 8677 8678% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC. It checks 8679% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {. It sets the context 8680% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases). Then, 8681% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular 8682% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC. 8683% 8684\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} 8685\def\braceorlinexxx{% 8686 \ifx\nchar\bgroup 8687 \macroargctxt 8688 \expandafter\passargtomacro 8689 \else 8690 \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg 8691 \fi \macnamexxx} 8692 8693 8694% @alias. 8695% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal 8696% sign. Make them active and then expand them all to nothing. 8697% 8698\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx} 8699\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax} 8700\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{% 8701 {% 8702 \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty 8703 \addtomacrolist{#1}% 8704 \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}% 8705 }% 8706 \next 8707} 8708 8709 8710\message{cross references,} 8711 8712\newwrite\auxfile 8713\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. 8714\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. 8715 8716% @inforef is relatively simple. 8717\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} 8718\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{% 8719 \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, 8720 node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} 8721 8722% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in 8723% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and 8724% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like: 8725% @node foo , bar , ... 8726% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name. 8727% 8728\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse} 8729% 8730% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this: 8731% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs 8732\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse} 8733\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} 8734 8735\let\nwnode=\node 8736\let\lastnode=\empty 8737 8738% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the 8739% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing). 8740% 8741\def\donoderef#1{% 8742 \ifx\lastnode\empty\else 8743 \setref{\lastnode}{#1}% 8744 \global\let\lastnode=\empty 8745 \fi 8746} 8747 8748% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. 8749% 8750\newcount\savesfregister 8751% 8752\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi} 8753\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi} 8754\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces} 8755 8756% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an 8757% anchor), which consists of three parts: 8758% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection, 8759% or the anchor name. 8760% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or 8761% empty for anchors. 8762% 3) NAME-pg - the page number. 8763% 8764% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of 8765% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here: 8766% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats. 8767% 8768\def\setref#1#2{% 8769 \pdfmkdest{#1}% 8770 \iflinks 8771 {% 8772 \requireauxfile 8773 \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them 8774 % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX. 8775 \def\value##1{##1}% 8776 \edef\writexrdef##1##2{% 8777 \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef 8778 ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef 8779 }% 8780 \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}% 8781 \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }% 8782 \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc. 8783 \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout 8784 }% 8785 \fi 8786} 8787 8788% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used 8789% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified. 8790% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title 8791% variable, now it's official. 8792% 8793\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{% 8794 \def\temp{#1}% 8795 \ifx\temp\onword 8796 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8797 = \empty 8798 \else\ifx\temp\offword 8799 \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname 8800 = \relax 8801 \else 8802 \errhelp = \EMsimple 8803 \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp', 8804 must be on|off}% 8805 \fi\fi 8806} 8807 8808% 8809% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is 8810% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed 8811% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed 8812% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. 8813% 8814\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX} 8815\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX} 8816\def\ref{\xrefXX} 8817 8818\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX} 8819\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]} 8820% 8821\newbox\toprefbox 8822\newbox\printedrefnamebox 8823\newbox\infofilenamebox 8824\newbox\printedmanualbox 8825% 8826\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup 8827 \unsepspaces 8828 % 8829 % Get args without leading/trailing spaces. 8830 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}% 8831 \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}% 8832 % 8833 \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}% 8834 \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}% 8835 % 8836 \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}% 8837 \setbox\printedmanualbox = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}% 8838 % 8839 % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in 8840 % the @xref, figure out what we want to use. 8841 \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8842 % No printed node name was explicitly given. 8843 \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax 8844 % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets. 8845 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8846 \else 8847 % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside 8848 % the square brackets if we have it. 8849 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8850 % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name. 8851 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8852 \else 8853 \ifhavexrefs 8854 % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values. 8855 \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}% 8856 \else 8857 % Otherwise just copy the Info node name. 8858 \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}% 8859 \fi% 8860 \fi 8861 \fi 8862 \fi 8863 % 8864 % Make link in pdf output. 8865 \ifpdf 8866 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX 8867 {\indexnofonts 8868 \makevalueexpandable 8869 \turnoffactive 8870 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8871 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8872 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8873 \getfilename{#4}% 8874 % 8875 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8876 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8877 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8878 % 8879 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8880 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8881 \fi 8882 % 8883 \leavevmode 8884 \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}% 8885 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8886 goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}% 8887 \else 8888 goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}% 8889 \fi 8890 }% 8891 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8892 \else 8893 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 8894 \else 8895 % For XeTeX 8896 {\indexnofonts 8897 \makevalueexpandable 8898 \turnoffactive 8899 % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _ 8900 % etc. don't get their TeX definitions. This ignores all spaces in 8901 % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename. 8902 \getfilename{#4}% 8903 % 8904 % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing 8905 % spaces in #1, which should be ignored. 8906 \setpdfdestname{#1}% 8907 % 8908 \ifx\pdfdestname\empty 8909 \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets 8910 \fi 8911 % 8912 \leavevmode 8913 \ifnum\filenamelength>0 8914 % With default settings, 8915 % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers. 8916 % In this case, the replaced destination names of 8917 % remote PDFs are no longer known. In order to avoid a replacement, 8918 % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'. 8919 % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+), 8920 % this command line option is no longer necessary 8921 % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special. 8922 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8923 << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8924 \else 8925 \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A 8926 << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}% 8927 \fi 8928 }% 8929 \setcolor{\linkcolor}% 8930 \fi 8931 \fi 8932 {% 8933 % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to 8934 % include an _ in the xref name, etc. 8935 \indexnofonts 8936 \turnoffactive 8937 \def\value##1{##1}% 8938 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle 8939 \csname XR#1-title\endcsname 8940 }% 8941 % 8942 % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2" 8943 % instead of "[somenode], p.3". \iffloat distinguishes them by 8944 % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string. 8945 \iffloat\Xthisreftitle 8946 % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref, 8947 % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2". 8948 \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt 8949 \refx{#1-snt}{}% 8950 \else 8951 \printedrefname 8952 \fi 8953 % 8954 % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append 8955 % "in MANUALNAME". 8956 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8957 \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}% 8958 \fi 8959 \else 8960 % node/anchor (non-float) references. 8961 % 8962 % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert 8963 % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not 8964 % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals 8965 % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, 8966 % this is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name 8967 % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time. 8968 % 8969 \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt 8970 % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name. 8971 % 8972 \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}% 8973 % 8974 \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt 8975 % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no 8976 % printed manual name (arg 5). This is essentially the same as 8977 % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else. 8978 % 8979 \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}% 8980 % 8981 \else 8982 % Reference within this manual. 8983 % 8984 % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the 8985 % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand 8986 % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of 8987 % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the 8988 % printing, back off for the \refx-pg. 8989 {\turnoffactive 8990 % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for 8991 % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. 8992 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% 8993 \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi 8994 }% 8995 % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden. 8996 \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname 8997 % 8998 % But we always want a comma and a space: 8999 ,\space 9000 % 9001 % output the `page 3'. 9002 \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% 9003 % Add a , if xref followed by a space 9004 \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,% 9005 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @TAB 9006 \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,% @* 9007 \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,% @SPACE 9008 \else\ifx\ 9009 \tokenafterxref ,% @NL 9010 \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie 9011 \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi 9012 \fi\fi 9013 \fi 9014 \endlink 9015\endgroup} 9016 9017% Output a cross-manual xref to #1. Used just above (twice). 9018% 9019% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither 9020% missing or Top. Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply 9021% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual. 9022% 9023% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the 9024% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in 9025% the input. By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less 9026% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g., 9027% in a monospaced font). Hopefully it will never happen in practice. 9028% 9029% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every 9030% reference, since the current font is indeterminate. 9031% 9032\def\crossmanualxref#1{% 9033 \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}% 9034 \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}% 9035 \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp % nonempty? 9036 \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else % same as Top? 9037 \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space 9038 \fi 9039 \fi 9040 #1% 9041} 9042 9043% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref 9044% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily, 9045% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly 9046% one that Bob is working on :). 9047% 9048\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]} 9049 9050% Things referred to by \setref. 9051% 9052\def\Ynothing{} 9053\def\Yomitfromtoc{} 9054\def\Ynumbered{% 9055 \ifnum\secno=0 9056 \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno 9057 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9058 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno 9059 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9060 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9061 \else 9062 \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9063 \fi\fi\fi 9064} 9065\def\Yappendix{% 9066 \ifnum\secno=0 9067 \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}% 9068 \else \ifnum\subsecno=0 9069 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno 9070 \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0 9071 \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno 9072 \else 9073 \putwordSection@tie 9074 @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno 9075 \fi\fi\fi 9076} 9077 9078% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME. SUFFIX 9079% is output afterwards if non-empty. 9080\def\refx#1#2{% 9081 \requireauxfile 9082 {% 9083 \indexnofonts 9084 \otherbackslash 9085 \def\value##1{##1}% 9086 \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX 9087 \csname XR#1\endcsname 9088 }% 9089 \ifx\thisrefX\relax 9090 % If not defined, say something at least. 9091 \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright 9092 \iflinks 9093 \ifhavexrefs 9094 {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value 9095 \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}% 9096 \else 9097 \ifwarnedxrefs\else 9098 \global\warnedxrefstrue 9099 \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% 9100 \fi 9101 \fi 9102 \fi 9103 \else 9104 % It's defined, so just use it. 9105 \thisrefX 9106 \fi 9107 #2% Output the suffix in any case. 9108} 9109 9110% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Define a control 9111% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 9112% name to avoid collisions). The value is the page number. If this is a float 9113% type, we have more work to do. 9114% 9115\def\xrdef#1#2{% 9116 {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences. 9117 % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands 9118 % like @'e. \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition. 9119 \indexnofonts 9120 \turnoffactive 9121 \def\value##1{##1}% 9122 \xdef\safexrefname{#1}% 9123 }% 9124 % 9125 \bgroup 9126 \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% 9127 \egroup 9128 % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 9129 % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 9130 % thousands of lines. \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does 9131 % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 9132 % 9133 % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float? 9134 \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname 9135 % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype. 9136 \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist 9137 \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname 9138 % 9139 % Is this the first time we've seen this float type? 9140 \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax 9141 \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do 9142 \else 9143 % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list. 9144 \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}% 9145 \fi 9146 % 9147 % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE, 9148 % for later use in \listoffloats. 9149 \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0 9150 {\safexrefname}}% 9151 \fi 9152} 9153 9154% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to 9155% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. 9156% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file. 9157% 9158\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. 9159\let\novalidate = \linksfalse 9160 9161% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it. 9162\def\requireauxfile{% 9163 \iflinks 9164 \tryauxfile 9165 % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. 9166 \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux 9167 \fi 9168 \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax % Only do this once. 9169} 9170 9171% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. 9172% 9173\def\tryauxfile{% 9174 \openin 1 \jobname.aux 9175 \ifeof 1 \else 9176 \readdatafile{aux}% 9177 \global\havexrefstrue 9178 \fi 9179 \closein 1 9180} 9181 9182\def\setupdatafile{% 9183 \catcode`\^^@=\other 9184 \catcode`\^^A=\other 9185 \catcode`\^^B=\other 9186 \catcode`\^^C=\other 9187 \catcode`\^^D=\other 9188 \catcode`\^^E=\other 9189 \catcode`\^^F=\other 9190 \catcode`\^^G=\other 9191 \catcode`\^^H=\other 9192 \catcode`\^^K=\other 9193 \catcode`\^^L=\other 9194 \catcode`\^^N=\other 9195 \catcode`\^^P=\other 9196 \catcode`\^^Q=\other 9197 \catcode`\^^R=\other 9198 \catcode`\^^S=\other 9199 \catcode`\^^T=\other 9200 \catcode`\^^U=\other 9201 \catcode`\^^V=\other 9202 \catcode`\^^W=\other 9203 \catcode`\^^X=\other 9204 \catcode`\^^Z=\other 9205 \catcode`\^^[=\other 9206 \catcode`\^^\=\other 9207 \catcode`\^^]=\other 9208 \catcode`\^^^=\other 9209 \catcode`\^^_=\other 9210 % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. 9211 % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't 9212 % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, 9213 % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ 9214 % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat 9215 % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first 9216 % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could 9217 % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. 9218 % 9219 % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: 9220 % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter 9221 % and then to call \auxhat in \setq. 9222 % 9223 \catcode`\^=\other 9224 % 9225 % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but... 9226 \catcode`\~=\other 9227 \catcode`\[=\other 9228 \catcode`\]=\other 9229 \catcode`\"=\other 9230 \catcode`\_=\other 9231 \catcode`\|=\other 9232 \catcode`\<=\other 9233 \catcode`\>=\other 9234 \catcode`\$=\other 9235 \catcode`\#=\other 9236 \catcode`\&=\other 9237 \catcode`\%=\other 9238 \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off 9239 % 9240 % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \ 9241 % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than 9242 % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \ 9243 % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value* 9244 % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that 9245 % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for 9246 % now. --karl, 15jan04. 9247 \catcode`\\=\other 9248 % 9249 % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces. 9250 \catcode`\{=1 9251 \catcode`\}=2 9252 \catcode`\@=0 9253} 9254 9255\def\readdatafile#1{% 9256\begingroup 9257 \setupdatafile 9258 \input\jobname.#1 9259\endgroup} 9260 9261 9262\message{insertions,} 9263% including footnotes. 9264 9265\newcount \footnoteno 9266 9267% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is 9268% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a 9269% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is 9270% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a 9271% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) 9272\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } 9273 9274% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only. 9275\let\footnotestyle=\comment 9276 9277{\catcode `\@=11 9278% 9279% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain. 9280\gdef\footnote{% 9281 \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne 9282 \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}% 9283 % 9284 % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the 9285 % extra spacing after we do the footnote number. 9286 \let\@sf\empty 9287 \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi 9288 % 9289 % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number. 9290 \unskip 9291 \thisfootno\@sf 9292 \dofootnote 9293}% 9294 9295% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the 9296% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. 9297% 9298% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses 9299% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when 9300% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. 9301% 9302\gdef\dofootnote{% 9303 \insert\footins\bgroup 9304 % 9305 % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot 9306 % more work. (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.) 9307 \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest 9308 % 9309 % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the 9310 % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. 9311 % So reset some parameters. 9312 \hsize=\txipagewidth 9313 \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty 9314 \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes 9315 \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox 9316 \floatingpenalty\@MM 9317 \leftskip\z@skip 9318 \rightskip\z@skip 9319 \spaceskip\z@skip 9320 \xspaceskip\z@skip 9321 \parindent\defaultparindent 9322 % 9323 \smallfonts \rm 9324 % 9325 % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears 9326 % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use 9327 % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote 9328 % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style). 9329 \let\noindent = \relax 9330 % 9331 % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the 9332 % footnote extends for more than one paragraph. 9333 \everypar = {\hang}% 9334 \textindent{\thisfootno}% 9335 % 9336 % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this 9337 % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it 9338 % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. 9339 \footstrut 9340 % 9341 % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine. 9342 \futurelet\next\fo@t 9343} 9344}%end \catcode `\@=11 9345 9346\def\errfootnotenest{% 9347 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9348 \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex, 9349 even though they work in makeinfo; sorry} 9350} 9351 9352\def\errfootnoteheading{% 9353 \errhelp=\EMsimple 9354 \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported} 9355} 9356 9357% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create 9358% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion 9359% would be lost. 9360% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote 9361% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished. 9362% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03. 9363% 9364% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro. 9365% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled 9366% out prematurely. 9367% 9368\def\startsavinginserts{% 9369 \ifx \insert\ptexinsert 9370 \let\insert\saveinsert 9371 \else 9372 \let\checkinserts\relax 9373 \fi 9374} 9375 9376% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and 9377% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}. 9378% 9379\def\saveinsert#1{% 9380 \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}% 9381 \afterassignment\next 9382 % swallow the left brace 9383 \let\temp = 9384} 9385\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}} 9386\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1} 9387 9388\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi} 9389 9390\def\placesaveins#1{% 9391 \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname 9392 {\box#1}% 9393} 9394 9395% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other: 9396{ 9397 \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-) 9398 \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{} 9399} 9400 9401% initialization: 9402\def\newsaveins #1{% 9403 \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}% 9404 \next 9405} 9406\def\newsaveinsX #1{% 9407 \csname newbox\endcsname #1% 9408 \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts 9409 \checksaveins #1}% 9410} 9411 9412% initialize: 9413\let\checkinserts\empty 9414\newsaveins\footins 9415\newsaveins\margin 9416 9417 9418% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. 9419% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. 9420% 9421% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image 9422% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get 9423% undone and the next image would fail. 9424\openin 1 = epsf.tex 9425\ifeof 1 \else 9426 % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in 9427 % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan). 9428 \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% 9429 \input epsf.tex 9430\fi 9431\closein 1 9432% 9433% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. 9434\newif\ifwarnednoepsf 9435\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to 9436 work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get 9437 it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} 9438% 9439\def\image#1{% 9440 \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined 9441 \ifwarnednoepsf \else 9442 \errhelp = \noepsfhelp 9443 \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% 9444 \global\warnednoepsftrue 9445 \fi 9446 \else 9447 \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish 9448 \fi 9449} 9450% 9451% Arguments to @image: 9452% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. 9453% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. 9454% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text. 9455% #5 is (ignored optional) extension. 9456% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff. 9457\newif\ifimagevmode 9458\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup 9459 \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example 9460 \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names 9461 \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro 9462 % If the image is by itself, center it. 9463 \ifvmode 9464 \imagevmodetrue 9465 \else \ifx\centersub\centerV 9466 % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space 9467 \imagevmodetrue 9468 \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev 9469 \fi\fi 9470 % 9471 \ifimagevmode 9472 \nobreak\medskip 9473 % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert 9474 % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space 9475 % above and below. 9476 \nobreak\vskip\parskip 9477 \nobreak 9478 \fi 9479 % 9480 % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing 9481 % environment such as @quotation is respected. 9482 % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the 9483 % normal paragraph indentation. 9484 % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't 9485 % want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and 9486 % eradicate the centering. 9487 \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi 9488 % 9489 % Output the image. 9490 \ifpdf 9491 % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80 9492 \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9493 \else 9494 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9495 % For epsf.tex 9496 % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. 9497 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% 9498 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi 9499 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}% 9500 \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi 9501 \epsfbox{#1.eps}% 9502 \else 9503 % For XeTeX 9504 \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}% 9505 \fi 9506 \fi 9507 % 9508 \ifimagevmode 9509 \medskip % space after a standalone image 9510 \fi 9511 \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi 9512\endgroup} 9513 9514 9515% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables, 9516% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the 9517% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future. 9518% 9519\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish} 9520 9521% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it. 9522\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,} 9523 9524% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically 9525% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted, 9526% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to. 9527% 9528% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to 9529% be referable. 9530% 9531% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It 9532% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom). 9533% 9534% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each 9535% chapter-level command. 9536\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty 9537% 9538\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% 9539 \let\thiscaption=\empty 9540 \let\thisshortcaption=\empty 9541 % 9542 % don't lose footnotes inside @float. 9543 % 9544 % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an 9545 % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04 9546 % 9547 \startsavinginserts 9548 % 9549 % We can't be used inside a paragraph. 9550 \par 9551 % 9552 \vtop\bgroup 9553 \def\floattype{#1}% 9554 \def\floatlabel{#2}% 9555 \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet. 9556 % 9557 \ifx\floattype\empty 9558 \let\safefloattype=\empty 9559 \else 9560 {% 9561 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9562 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9563 \indexnofonts 9564 \turnoffactive 9565 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9566 }% 9567 \fi 9568 % 9569 % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type. 9570 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9571 % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1, 9572 % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.) 9573 % 9574 \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname 9575 \global\advance\floatno by 1 9576 % 9577 {% 9578 % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the 9579 % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float 9580 % labels (which have a completely different output format) from 9581 % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the 9582 % lists of floats. 9583 % 9584 \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}% 9585 \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}% 9586 }% 9587 \fi 9588 % 9589 % start with \parskip glue, I guess. 9590 \vskip\parskip 9591 % 9592 % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section. 9593 \restorefirstparagraphindent 9594} 9595 9596% we have these possibilities: 9597% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap 9598% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1 9599% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap 9600% @float Foo & no caption: Foo 9601% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap 9602% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1 9603% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap 9604% @float & no caption: 9605% 9606\def\Efloat{% 9607 \let\floatident = \empty 9608 % 9609 % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first. 9610 \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi 9611 % 9612 % If we have an xref label, the number comes next. 9613 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9614 \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first. 9615 \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}% 9616 \fi 9617 % the number. 9618 \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9619 \fi 9620 % 9621 % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in 9622 % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again. 9623 \let\captionline = \floatident 9624 % 9625 \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else 9626 \ifx\floatident\empty \else 9627 \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between 9628 \fi 9629 % 9630 % caption text. 9631 \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}% 9632 \fi 9633 % 9634 % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before. 9635 % Eventually this needs to become an \insert. 9636 \ifx\captionline\empty \else 9637 \vskip.5\parskip 9638 \captionline 9639 % 9640 % Space below caption. 9641 \vskip\parskip 9642 \fi 9643 % 9644 % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this 9645 % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint. 9646 \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else 9647 % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as 9648 % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short 9649 % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing. 9650 {% 9651 \requireauxfile 9652 \atdummies 9653 % 9654 \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty 9655 \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}% 9656 \else 9657 \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}% 9658 \fi 9659 \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident 9660 \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}% 9661 }% 9662 \fi 9663 \egroup % end of \vtop 9664 % 9665 \checkinserts 9666} 9667 9668% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either. 9669% 9670\def\appendtomacro#1#2{% 9671 \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}% 9672} 9673 9674% @caption, @shortcaption 9675% 9676\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption} 9677\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption} 9678\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption} 9679\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}} 9680 9681% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are 9682% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno. 9683\def\getfloatno#1{% 9684 \ifx#1\relax 9685 % Haven't seen this figure type before. 9686 \csname newcount\endcsname #1% 9687 % 9688 % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap. 9689 \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos 9690 \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }% 9691 \fi 9692 \let\floatno#1% 9693} 9694 9695% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref 9696% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we 9697% first read the @float command. 9698% 9699\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}% 9700 9701% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can 9702% distinguish floats from other xref types. 9703\def\floatmagic{!!float!!} 9704 9705% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional 9706% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic 9707% \lastsection value which we \setref above. 9708% 9709\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish} 9710% 9711% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the 9712% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2. 9713% 9714\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{% 9715 \def\temp{#1}% 9716 \def\iffloattype{#2}% 9717 \ifx\temp\floatmagic 9718} 9719 9720% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents. 9721% 9722\parseargdef\listoffloats{% 9723 \def\floattype{#1}% floattype 9724 {% 9725 % the floattype might have accents or other special characters, 9726 % but we need to use it in a control sequence name. 9727 \indexnofonts 9728 \turnoffactive 9729 \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}% 9730 }% 9731 % 9732 % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE. 9733 \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax 9734 \ifhavexrefs 9735 % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo. 9736 \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}% 9737 \fi 9738 \else 9739 \begingroup 9740 \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc 9741 \let\do=\listoffloatsdo 9742 \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname 9743 \endgroup 9744 \fi 9745} 9746 9747% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the 9748% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the 9749% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which 9750% has the text we're supposed to typeset here. 9751% 9752% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since 9753% they won't appear in the aux file). 9754% 9755\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish} 9756\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{% 9757 % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just 9758 % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the 9759 % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link 9760 % in pdf output. 9761 \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}% 9762 % 9763 % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index. 9764 \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}% 9765 \writeentry 9766}} 9767 9768 9769\message{localization,} 9770 9771% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very 9772% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language 9773% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation. 9774% 9775{ 9776 \catcode`\_ = \active 9777 \globaldefs=1 9778\parseargdef\documentlanguage{% 9779 \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX. 9780 % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists. 9781 \let_ = \normalunderscore % normal _ character for filename test 9782 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9783 \ifeof 1 9784 \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish 9785 \else 9786 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9787 \input txi-#1.tex 9788 \fi 9789 \closein 1 9790 \endgroup % end raw TeX 9791} 9792% 9793% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist, 9794% try txi-de.tex. 9795% 9796\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{% 9797 \openin 1 txi-#1.tex 9798 \ifeof 1 9799 \errhelp = \nolanghelp 9800 \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}% 9801 \else 9802 \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist 9803 \input txi-#1.tex 9804 \fi 9805 \closein 1 9806} 9807}% end of special _ catcode 9808% 9809\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or 9810is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current 9811directory should work if nowhere else does.} 9812 9813% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the 9814% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and 9815% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin. 9816% 9817% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built. 9818% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g., 9819% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log. 9820% 9821% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all 9822% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in 9823% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the 9824% accented characters problem.) 9825% 9826\catcode`@=11 9827\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{% 9828 % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX. 9829 \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax 9830 \message{no patterns for #1}% 9831 \else 9832 \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname 9833 \fi 9834 % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless. 9835 \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax 9836 \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax 9837} 9838 9839% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively. 9840% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation. 9841% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise. 9842% 9843\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable 9844\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio 9845 9846\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9847 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9848 \txinativeunicodecapablefalse 9849 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9850 \else 9851 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9852 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9853 \fi 9854\else 9855 \txinativeunicodecapabletrue 9856 \txiusebytewiseiofalse 9857\fi 9858 9859% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex 9860% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings. 9861% 9862\def\setbytewiseio{% 9863 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9864 \else 9865 \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes" % For subsequent files to be read 9866 \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes" % For document root file 9867 % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for 9868 % output encoding. This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files. 9869 % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in 9870 % place of non-ASCII characters. 9871 \fi 9872 9873 \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined 9874 \else 9875 \directlua{ 9876 local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub 9877 local function convert_char (char) 9878 return utf8_char(byte(char)) 9879 end 9880 9881 local function convert_line (line) 9882 return gsub(line, ".", convert_char) 9883 end 9884 9885 callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line) 9886 9887 local function convert_line_out (line) 9888 local line_out = "" 9889 for c in string.utfvalues(line) do 9890 line_out = line_out .. string.char(c) 9891 end 9892 return line_out 9893 end 9894 9895 callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out) 9896 } 9897 \fi 9898 9899 \txiusebytewiseiotrue 9900} 9901 9902 9903% Helpers for encodings. 9904% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number. 9905% 9906\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{% 9907 \count255=128 9908 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9909 \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax 9910 \advance\count255 by 1 9911 \repeat 9912} 9913 9914\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{% 9915 \count255=128 9916 \loop\ifnum\count255<256 9917 \catcode\count255=#1\relax 9918 \advance\count255 by 1 9919 \repeat 9920} 9921 9922% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters 9923% according to the specified encoding. 9924% 9925\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz} 9926\def\documentencodingzzz#1{% 9927 % 9928 % Encoding being declared for the document. 9929 \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}% 9930 % 9931 % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able 9932 % to compare them with \ifx. 9933 \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}% 9934 \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}% 9935 \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}% 9936 \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}% 9937 \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}% 9938 % 9939 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9940 \asciichardefs 9941 % 9942 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo 9943 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9944 \setbytewiseio 9945 \fi 9946 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9947 \lattwochardefs 9948 % 9949 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone 9950 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9951 \setbytewiseio 9952 \fi 9953 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9954 \latonechardefs 9955 % 9956 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine 9957 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9958 \setbytewiseio 9959 \fi 9960 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9961 \latninechardefs 9962 % 9963 \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9964 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 9965 % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) 9966 \nativeunicodechardefs 9967 \else 9968 % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX) 9969 \setnonasciicharscatcode\active 9970 % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level 9971 % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated 9972 % definitions gets triggered. Making non-ascii chars active is 9973 % sufficient. 9974 \fi 9975 % 9976 \else 9977 \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}% 9978 % 9979 \fi % utfeight 9980 \fi % latnine 9981 \fi % latone 9982 \fi % lattwo 9983 \fi % ascii 9984 % 9985 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 9986 \else 9987 \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight 9988 \else 9989 \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii 9990 \else 9991 \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle % 9992 non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}% 9993 \fi 9994 \fi 9995 \fi 9996} 9997 9998% emacs-page 9999% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available 10000% the default font encoding (OT1). 10001% 10002\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}} 10003 10004% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference. 10005\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi} 10006 10007% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be 10008% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of 10009% macros containing the character definitions. 10010\setnonasciicharscatcode\active 10011% 10012 10013\def\gdefchar#1#2{% 10014\gdef#1{% 10015 \ifpassthroughchars 10016 \string#1% 10017 \else 10018 #2% 10019 \fi 10020}} 10021 10022% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions. 10023\def\latonechardefs{% 10024 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10025 \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown} 10026 \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent 10027 \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}} 10028 \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency 10029 \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen 10030 \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar 10031 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10032 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10033 \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}} 10034 \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf} 10035 \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}} 10036 \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot} 10037 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10038 \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}} 10039 \gdefchar^^af{\={}} 10040 % 10041 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree} 10042 \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$} 10043 \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$} 10044 \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$} 10045 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10046 \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$} 10047 \gdefchar^^b6{\P} 10048 \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot} 10049 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10050 \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$} 10051 \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm} 10052 \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}} 10053 \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$} 10054 \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$} 10055 \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$} 10056 \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown} 10057 % 10058 \gdefchar^^c0{\`A} 10059 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10060 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10061 \gdefchar^^c3{\~A} 10062 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10063 \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A} 10064 \gdefchar^^c6{\AE} 10065 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10066 \gdefchar^^c8{\`E} 10067 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10068 \gdefchar^^ca{\^E} 10069 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10070 \gdefchar^^cc{\`I} 10071 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10072 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10073 \gdefchar^^cf{\"I} 10074 % 10075 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10076 \gdefchar^^d1{\~N} 10077 \gdefchar^^d2{\`O} 10078 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10079 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10080 \gdefchar^^d5{\~O} 10081 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10082 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10083 \gdefchar^^d8{\O} 10084 \gdefchar^^d9{\`U} 10085 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10086 \gdefchar^^db{\^U} 10087 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10088 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10089 \gdefchar^^de{\TH} 10090 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10091 % 10092 \gdefchar^^e0{\`a} 10093 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10094 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10095 \gdefchar^^e3{\~a} 10096 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10097 \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a} 10098 \gdefchar^^e6{\ae} 10099 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10100 \gdefchar^^e8{\`e} 10101 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10102 \gdefchar^^ea{\^e} 10103 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10104 \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}} 10105 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}} 10106 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}} 10107 \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}} 10108 % 10109 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10110 \gdefchar^^f1{\~n} 10111 \gdefchar^^f2{\`o} 10112 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10113 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10114 \gdefchar^^f5{\~o} 10115 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10116 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10117 \gdefchar^^f8{\o} 10118 \gdefchar^^f9{\`u} 10119 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10120 \gdefchar^^fb{\^u} 10121 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10122 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10123 \gdefchar^^fe{\th} 10124 \gdefchar^^ff{\"y} 10125} 10126 10127% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions. 10128\def\latninechardefs{% 10129 % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1. 10130 \latonechardefs 10131 % 10132 \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}} 10133 \gdefchar^^a6{\v S} 10134 \gdefchar^^a8{\v s} 10135 \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z} 10136 \gdefchar^^b8{\v z} 10137 \gdefchar^^bc{\OE} 10138 \gdefchar^^bd{\oe} 10139 \gdefchar^^be{\"Y} 10140} 10141 10142% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions. 10143\def\lattwochardefs{% 10144 \gdefchar^^a0{\tie} 10145 \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}} 10146 \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}} 10147 \gdefchar^^a3{\L} 10148 \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}} 10149 \gdefchar^^a5{\v L} 10150 \gdefchar^^a6{\'S} 10151 \gdefchar^^a7{\S} 10152 \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}} 10153 \gdefchar^^a9{\v S} 10154 \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S} 10155 \gdefchar^^ab{\v T} 10156 \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z} 10157 \gdefchar^^ad{\-} 10158 \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z} 10159 \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z} 10160 % 10161 \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}} 10162 \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}} 10163 \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }} 10164 \gdefchar^^b3{\l} 10165 \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}} 10166 \gdefchar^^b5{\v l} 10167 \gdefchar^^b6{\'s} 10168 \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}} 10169 \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ } 10170 \gdefchar^^b9{\v s} 10171 \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s} 10172 \gdefchar^^bb{\v t} 10173 \gdefchar^^bc{\'z} 10174 \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}} 10175 \gdefchar^^be{\v z} 10176 \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z} 10177 % 10178 \gdefchar^^c0{\'R} 10179 \gdefchar^^c1{\'A} 10180 \gdefchar^^c2{\^A} 10181 \gdefchar^^c3{\u A} 10182 \gdefchar^^c4{\"A} 10183 \gdefchar^^c5{\'L} 10184 \gdefchar^^c6{\'C} 10185 \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C} 10186 \gdefchar^^c8{\v C} 10187 \gdefchar^^c9{\'E} 10188 \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}} 10189 \gdefchar^^cb{\"E} 10190 \gdefchar^^cc{\v E} 10191 \gdefchar^^cd{\'I} 10192 \gdefchar^^ce{\^I} 10193 \gdefchar^^cf{\v D} 10194 % 10195 \gdefchar^^d0{\DH} 10196 \gdefchar^^d1{\'N} 10197 \gdefchar^^d2{\v N} 10198 \gdefchar^^d3{\'O} 10199 \gdefchar^^d4{\^O} 10200 \gdefchar^^d5{\H O} 10201 \gdefchar^^d6{\"O} 10202 \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$} 10203 \gdefchar^^d8{\v R} 10204 \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U} 10205 \gdefchar^^da{\'U} 10206 \gdefchar^^db{\H U} 10207 \gdefchar^^dc{\"U} 10208 \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y} 10209 \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T} 10210 \gdefchar^^df{\ss} 10211 % 10212 \gdefchar^^e0{\'r} 10213 \gdefchar^^e1{\'a} 10214 \gdefchar^^e2{\^a} 10215 \gdefchar^^e3{\u a} 10216 \gdefchar^^e4{\"a} 10217 \gdefchar^^e5{\'l} 10218 \gdefchar^^e6{\'c} 10219 \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c} 10220 \gdefchar^^e8{\v c} 10221 \gdefchar^^e9{\'e} 10222 \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}} 10223 \gdefchar^^eb{\"e} 10224 \gdefchar^^ec{\v e} 10225 \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}} 10226 \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}} 10227 \gdefchar^^ef{\v d} 10228 % 10229 \gdefchar^^f0{\dh} 10230 \gdefchar^^f1{\'n} 10231 \gdefchar^^f2{\v n} 10232 \gdefchar^^f3{\'o} 10233 \gdefchar^^f4{\^o} 10234 \gdefchar^^f5{\H o} 10235 \gdefchar^^f6{\"o} 10236 \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$} 10237 \gdefchar^^f8{\v r} 10238 \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u} 10239 \gdefchar^^fa{\'u} 10240 \gdefchar^^fb{\H u} 10241 \gdefchar^^fc{\"u} 10242 \gdefchar^^fd{\'y} 10243 \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t} 10244 \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}} 10245} 10246 10247% UTF-8 character definitions. 10248% 10249% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some 10250% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by 10251% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team. 10252% 10253\newcount\countUTFx 10254\newcount\countUTFy 10255\newcount\countUTFz 10256 10257\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter 10258 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname} 10259% 10260\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter 10261 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname} 10262% 10263\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter 10264 \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname} 10265 10266\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{% 10267 \ifx #1\relax 10268 \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}% 10269 \else 10270 \expandafter #1% 10271 \fi 10272} 10273 10274% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences 10275\begingroup 10276 \catcode`\~13 10277 \catcode`\$12 10278 \catcode`\"12 10279 10280 % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp 10281 % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value. 10282 \def\UTFviiiLoop{% 10283 \global\catcode\countUTFx\active 10284 \uccode`\~\countUTFx 10285 \uccode`\$\countUTFx 10286 \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}% 10287 \advance\countUTFx by 1 10288 \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy 10289 \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop 10290 \fi} 10291 10292 % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence. Not expected to 10293 % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files. 10294 \countUTFx = "80 10295 \countUTFy = "C2 10296 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10297 \gdef~{% 10298 \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}% 10299 \UTFviiiLoop 10300 10301 \countUTFx = "C2 10302 \countUTFy = "E0 10303 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10304 \gdef~{% 10305 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10306 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10307 \UTFviiiLoop 10308 10309 \countUTFx = "E0 10310 \countUTFy = "F0 10311 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10312 \gdef~{% 10313 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10314 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}% 10315 \UTFviiiLoop 10316 10317 \countUTFx = "F0 10318 \countUTFy = "F4 10319 \def\UTFviiiTmp{% 10320 \gdef~{% 10321 \ifpassthroughchars $% 10322 \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi 10323 }}% 10324 \UTFviiiLoop 10325\endgroup 10326 10327\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below 10328 10329% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it. 10330\def\U#1{% 10331 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax 10332 \iftxinativeunicodecapable 10333 % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is 10334 % active. However, if the font does not have the glyph, 10335 % letters are missing. 10336 \begingroup 10337 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 10338 \uppercase{.} 10339 \endgroup 10340 \else 10341 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10342 \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}% 10343 \fi 10344 \else 10345 \csname uni:#1\endcsname 10346 \fi 10347} 10348 10349% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control 10350% sequence to be defined. 10351\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{% 10352 \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}% 10353\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{% 10354 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}% 10355\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{% 10356 \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}% 10357 10358% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX), 10359% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character; 10360% this gets used by the @U command 10361% 10362\begingroup 10363 \catcode`\"=12 10364 \catcode`\<=12 10365 \catcode`\.=12 10366 \catcode`\,=12 10367 \catcode`\;=12 10368 \catcode`\!=12 10369 \catcode`\~=13 10370 \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{% 10371 \countUTFz = "#1\relax 10372 \begingroup 10373 \parseXMLCharref 10374 10375 % Give \u8:... its definition. The sequence of seven \expandafter's 10376 % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g. 10377 % 10378 % 1. \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2 10379 % 2. \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname 10380 % 3. \u8: B1 B2 (a single control sequence token) 10381 % 10382 \expandafter\expandafter 10383 \expandafter\expandafter 10384 \expandafter\expandafter 10385 \expandafter\gdef \UTFviiiTmp{#2}% 10386 % 10387 \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else 10388 \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}% 10389 \fi 10390 % 10391 % define an additional control sequence for this code point. 10392 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp 10393 \endgroup} 10394 % 10395 % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp 10396 % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence. 10397 \gdef\parseXMLCharref{% 10398 \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax 10399 \errhelp = \EMsimple 10400 \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}% 10401 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax 10402 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10403 \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,% 10404 \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax 10405 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10406 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10407 \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}% 10408 \else 10409 \parseUTFviiiA;% 10410 \parseUTFviiiA,% 10411 \parseUTFviiiA!% 10412 \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}% 10413 \fi\fi\fi 10414 } 10415 10416 % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx. 10417 % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence. 10418 % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one 10419 % of the bytes. 10420 \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{% 10421 \countUTFx = \countUTFz 10422 \divide\countUTFz by 64 10423 \countUTFy = \countUTFz % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz. 10424 \multiply\countUTFz by 64 10425 10426 % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared. Subtract 10427 % in order to get the last five bits. 10428 \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz 10429 10430 % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence. 10431 \advance\countUTFx by 128 10432 \uccode `#1\countUTFx 10433 \countUTFz = \countUTFy} 10434 10435 % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp 10436 % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8 10437 % sequence. 10438 % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros. 10439 % #3 is always a full stop (.) 10440 % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence. The values for these 10441 % bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's. 10442 \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{% 10443 \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax 10444 \uccode `#3\countUTFz 10445 \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}} 10446\endgroup 10447 10448% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 10449% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally 10450% 10451\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{% 10452 \catcode"#1=\other 10453} 10454 10455% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M 10456% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block) 10457% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block) 10458% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A 10459% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B 10460% 10461% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing 10462% characters are available somewhere. Loading the necessary fonts 10463% awaits user request. We can't truly support Unicode without 10464% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years, 10465% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else. 10466% We won't be doing that here in this simple file. But we can try to at 10467% least make most of the characters not bomb out. 10468% 10469\def\unicodechardefs{% 10470 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}% 10471 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}% 10472 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent 10473 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}% 10474 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency 10475 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen 10476 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar 10477 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}% 10478 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}% 10479 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}% 10480 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}% 10481 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}% 10482 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}% 10483 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}% 10484 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}% 10485 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}% 10486 % 10487 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}% 10488 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}% 10489 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}% 10490 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}% 10491 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}% 10492 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}% 10493 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}% 10494 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 10495 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}% 10496 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}% 10497 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}% 10498 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}% 10499 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}% 10500 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}% 10501 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}% 10502 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}% 10503 % 10504 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}% 10505 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}% 10506 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}% 10507 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}% 10508 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}% 10509 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}% 10510 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}% 10511 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}% 10512 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}% 10513 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}% 10514 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}% 10515 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}% 10516 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}% 10517 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}% 10518 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}% 10519 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}% 10520 % 10521 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}% 10522 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}% 10523 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}% 10524 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}% 10525 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}% 10526 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}% 10527 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}% 10528 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}% 10529 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}% 10530 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}% 10531 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}% 10532 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}% 10533 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}% 10534 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}% 10535 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}% 10536 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}% 10537 % 10538 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}% 10539 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}% 10540 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}% 10541 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}% 10542 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}% 10543 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}% 10544 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}% 10545 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}% 10546 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}% 10547 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}% 10548 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}% 10549 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}% 10550 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}% 10551 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}% 10552 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}% 10553 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}% 10554 % 10555 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}% 10556 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}% 10557 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}% 10558 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}% 10559 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}% 10560 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}% 10561 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}% 10562 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}% 10563 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}% 10564 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}% 10565 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}% 10566 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}% 10567 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}% 10568 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}% 10569 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}% 10570 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}% 10571 % 10572 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}% 10573 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}% 10574 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}% 10575 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}% 10576 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}% 10577 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}% 10578 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}% 10579 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}% 10580 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}% 10581 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}% 10582 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}% 10583 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}% 10584 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}% 10585 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}% 10586 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}% 10587 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}% 10588 % 10589 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}% 10590 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}% 10591 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}% 10592 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}% 10593 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}% 10594 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}% 10595 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}% 10596 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}% 10597 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}% 10598 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}% 10599 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}% 10600 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}% 10601 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}% 10602 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}% 10603 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}% 10604 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}% 10605 % 10606 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}% 10607 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}% 10608 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}% 10609 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}% 10610 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}% 10611 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}% 10612 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10613 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10614 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}% 10615 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}% 10616 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}% 10617 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}% 10618 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}% 10619 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}% 10620 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}% 10621 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}% 10622 % 10623 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}% 10624 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}% 10625 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}% 10626 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}% 10627 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}% 10628 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}% 10629 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}% 10630 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}% 10631 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10632 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}% 10633 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}% 10634 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}% 10635 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}% 10636 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern 10637 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern 10638 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}% 10639 % 10640 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}% 10641 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}% 10642 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}% 10643 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}% 10644 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}% 10645 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}% 10646 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}% 10647 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}% 10648 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}% 10649 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}% 10650 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}% 10651 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}% 10652 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}% 10653 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}% 10654 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}% 10655 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}% 10656 % 10657 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}% 10658 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}% 10659 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}% 10660 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}% 10661 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}% 10662 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}% 10663 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}% 10664 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}% 10665 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}% 10666 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}% 10667 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}% 10668 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}% 10669 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}% 10670 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}% 10671 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}% 10672 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}% 10673 % 10674 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}% 10675 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}% 10676 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}% 10677 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}% 10678 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}% 10679 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}% 10680 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}% 10681 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}% 10682 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}% 10683 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}% 10684 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}% 10685 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}% 10686 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}% 10687 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}% 10688 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}% 10689 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}% 10690 % 10691 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}% 10692 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}% 10693 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}% 10694 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}% 10695 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}% 10696 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}% 10697 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}% 10698 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}% 10699 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}% 10700 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}% 10701 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}% 10702 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}% 10703 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}% 10704 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}% 10705 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}% 10706 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}% 10707 % 10708 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}% 10709 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}% 10710 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}% 10711 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}% 10712 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}% 10713 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}% 10714 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}% 10715 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}% 10716 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}% 10717 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}% 10718 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}% 10719 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}% 10720 % 10721 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}% 10722 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}% 10723 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}% 10724 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}% 10725 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}% 10726 % 10727 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}% 10728 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}% 10729 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}% 10730 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}% 10731 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}% 10732 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}% 10733 % 10734 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}% 10735 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}% 10736 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}% 10737 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}% 10738 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}% 10739 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}% 10740 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}% 10741 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}% 10742 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}% 10743 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}% 10744 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}% 10745 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}% 10746 % 10747 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}% 10748 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}% 10749 % 10750 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}% 10751 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}% 10752 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}% 10753 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}% 10754 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}% 10755 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}% 10756 % 10757 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}% 10758 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}% 10759 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}% 10760 % 10761 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}% 10762 % 10763 % Greek letters upper case 10764 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}% 10765 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}% 10766 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}% 10767 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}% 10768 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}% 10769 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}% 10770 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}% 10771 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}% 10772 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}% 10773 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}% 10774 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}% 10775 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}% 10776 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}% 10777 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}% 10778 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}% 10779 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}% 10780 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}% 10781 %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma 10782 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}% 10783 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}% 10784 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}% 10785 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}% 10786 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}% 10787 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}% 10788 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}% 10789 % 10790 % Vowels with accents 10791 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}% 10792 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}% 10793 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}% 10794 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}% 10795 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}% 10796 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}% 10797 % 10798 % Standalone accent 10799 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}% 10800 % 10801 % Greek letters lower case 10802 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}% 10803 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}% 10804 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}% 10805 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}% 10806 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}% 10807 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}% 10808 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}% 10809 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}% 10810 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}% 10811 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}% 10812 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}% 10813 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}% 10814 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}% 10815 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}% 10816 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron 10817 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}% 10818 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}% 10819 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}% 10820 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}% 10821 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}% 10822 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}% 10823 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}% 10824 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}% 10825 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}% 10826 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}% 10827 % 10828 % More Greek vowels with accents 10829 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}% 10830 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}% 10831 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}% 10832 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}% 10833 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}% 10834 % 10835 % Variant Greek letters 10836 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}% 10837 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}% 10838 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}% 10839 % 10840 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}% 10841 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}% 10842 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}% 10843 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}% 10844 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}% 10845 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}% 10846 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}% 10847 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}% 10848 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}% 10849 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}% 10850 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}% 10851 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}% 10852 % 10853 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}% 10854 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}% 10855 % 10856 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}% 10857 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}% 10858 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}% 10859 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}% 10860 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}% 10861 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}% 10862 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}% 10863 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}% 10864 % 10865 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}% 10866 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}% 10867 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}% 10868 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}% 10869 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}% 10870 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}% 10871 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}% 10872 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}% 10873 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}% 10874 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}% 10875 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}% 10876 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}% 10877 % 10878 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}% 10879 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}% 10880 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}% 10881 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}% 10882 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}% 10883 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}% 10884 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}% 10885 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}% 10886 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}% 10887 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}% 10888 % 10889 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}% 10890 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}% 10891 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}% 10892 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}% 10893 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}% 10894 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}% 10895 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}% 10896 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}% 10897 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}% 10898 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}% 10899 % 10900 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}% 10901 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}% 10902 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}% 10903 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}% 10904 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}% 10905 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}% 10906 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}% 10907 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}% 10908 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}% 10909 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}% 10910 % 10911 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}% 10912 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}% 10913 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}% 10914 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}% 10915 % 10916 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}% 10917 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}% 10918 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}% 10919 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}% 10920 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}% 10921 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}% 10922 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}% 10923 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}% 10924 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}% 10925 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}% 10926 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}% 10927 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}% 10928 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}% 10929 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}% 10930 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}% 10931 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}% 10932 % 10933 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}% 10934 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}% 10935 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}% 10936 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}% 10937 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}% 10938 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}% 10939 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}% 10940 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}% 10941 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}% 10942 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}% 10943 % 10944 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}% 10945 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}% 10946 % 10947 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}% 10948 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}% 10949 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}% 10950 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}% 10951 % 10952 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}% 10953 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}% 10954 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}% 10955 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}% 10956 % 10957 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}% 10958 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}% 10959 % 10960 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}% 10961 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}% 10962 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}% 10963 % 10964 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}% 10965 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}% 10966 % 10967 % Punctuation 10968 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}% 10969 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}% 10970 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}% 10971 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}% 10972 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}% 10973 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}% 10974 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}% 10975 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}% 10976 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}% 10977 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}% 10978 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}% 10979 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}% 10980 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}% 10981 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}% 10982 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}% 10983 % 10984 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}% 10985 % 10986 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}% 10987 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}% 10988 % 10989 % Mathematical symbols 10990 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}% 10991 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}% 10992 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}% 10993 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}% 10994 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}% 10995 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}% 10996 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}% 10997 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}% 10998 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}% 10999 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}% 11000 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}% 11001 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}% 11002 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}% 11003 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}% 11004 % 11005 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}% 11006 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}% 11007 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}% 11008 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}% 11009 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}% 11010 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}% 11011 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}% 11012 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2127}{\ensuremath\mho}% 11013 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}% 11014 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}% 11015 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}% 11016 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}% 11017 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}% 11018 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}% 11019 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}% 11020 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}% 11021 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}% 11022 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}% 11023 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}% 11024 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}% 11025 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}% 11026 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}% 11027 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}% 11028 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BE}{\ensuremath\upharpoonright}% 11029 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}% 11030 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}% 11031 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}% 11032 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}% 11033 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}% 11034 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}% 11035 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}% 11036 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}% 11037 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21DD}{\ensuremath\leadsto}% 11038 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2201}{\ensuremath\complement}% 11039 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}% 11040 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}% 11041 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}% 11042 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}% 11043 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}% 11044 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}% 11045 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}% 11046 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}% 11047 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}% 11048 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}% 11049 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}% 11050 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}% 11051 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}% 11052 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}% 11053 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}% 11054 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}% 11055 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}% 11056 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}% 11057 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}% 11058 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}% 11059 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}% 11060 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}% 11061 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}% 11062 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}% 11063 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}% 11064 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}% 11065 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}% 11066 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}% 11067 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}% 11068 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}% 11069 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}% 11070 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}% 11071 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}% 11072 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228F}{\ensuremath\sqsubset}% 11073 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2290}{\ensuremath\sqsupset}% 11074 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}% 11075 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}% 11076 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}% 11077 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}% 11078 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}% 11079 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}% 11080 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}% 11081 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}% 11082 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}% 11083 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}% 11084 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}% 11085 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}% 11086 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}% 11087 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}% 11088 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B4}{\ensuremath\unlhd}% 11089 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22B5}{\ensuremath\unrhd}% 11090 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}% 11091 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}% 11092 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}% 11093 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}% 11094 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}% 11095 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}% 11096 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}% 11097 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}% 11098 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}% 11099 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}% 11100 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}% 11101 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}% 11102 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}% 11103 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}% 11104 % 11105 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25A1}{\ensuremath\Box}% 11106 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}% 11107 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}% 11108 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}% 11109 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}% 11110 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\Diamond}% 11111 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}% 11112 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}% 11113 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}% 11114 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}% 11115 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}% 11116 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}% 11117 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}% 11118 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}% 11119 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}% 11120 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}% 11121 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}% 11122 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}% 11123 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}% 11124 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}% 11125 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}% 11126 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}% 11127 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}% 11128 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}% 11129 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}% 11130 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}% 11131 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}% 11132 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A1D}{\ensuremath\Join}% 11133 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}% 11134 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}% 11135 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}% 11136 % 11137 \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign 11138 \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}% 11139}% end of \unicodechardefs 11140 11141% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command) 11142% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence. 11143\def\utfeightchardefs{% 11144 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii 11145 \unicodechardefs 11146} 11147 11148% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to 11149% non-active tokens with the same character code. This is used to 11150% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for 11151% printing the correct glyphs. 11152\newif\ifpassthroughchars 11153\passthroughcharsfalse 11154 11155% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11156% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character 11157% 11158\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{% 11159 \catcode"#1=\active 11160 \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{% 11161 \begingroup 11162 \uccode`\~="##2\relax 11163 \uppercase{\gdef~}{% 11164 \ifpassthroughchars 11165 ##1% 11166 \else 11167 ##3% 11168 \fi 11169 } 11170 \endgroup 11171 } 11172 \begingroup 11173 \uccode`\.="#1\relax 11174 \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}% 11175 \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}% 11176 \endgroup 11177} 11178 11179% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition. 11180% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters. 11181\def\nativeunicodechardefs{% 11182 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative 11183 \unicodechardefs 11184} 11185 11186% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX), 11187% make the character token expand 11188% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing. 11189\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{% 11190 \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2} 11191 \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp 11192} 11193 11194% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX). 11195\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{% 11196 \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU 11197 \unicodechardefs 11198} 11199 11200% US-ASCII character definitions. 11201\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done 11202 \relax 11203} 11204 11205% define all Unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U. 11206\iftxinativeunicodecapable 11207 \nativeunicodechardefsatu 11208\else 11209 \utfeightchardefs 11210\fi 11211 11212 11213% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with 11214% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a 11215% document encoding. 11216% 11217\setnonasciicharscatcode \other 11218 11219 11220\message{formatting,} 11221 11222\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt 11223 11224\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt 11225\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt 11226\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt 11227 11228% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. 11229\vbadness = 10000 11230 11231% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either. 11232\hbadness = 6666 11233 11234% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans. 11235\widowpenalty=10000 11236\clubpenalty=10000 11237 11238% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're 11239% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of 11240% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on 11241% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set. 11242% 11243\def\setemergencystretch{% 11244 \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined 11245 % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. 11246 \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% 11247 \else 11248 \emergencystretch = .15\hsize 11249 \fi 11250} 11251 11252% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 11253% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip; 11254% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width. 11255% 11256% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define 11257% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip. 11258% 11259\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% 11260 \voffset = #3\relax 11261 \topskip = #6\relax 11262 \splittopskip = \topskip 11263 % 11264 \vsize = #1\relax 11265 \advance\vsize by \topskip 11266 \outervsize = \vsize 11267 \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin 11268 \txipageheight = \vsize 11269 % 11270 \hsize = #2\relax 11271 \outerhsize = \hsize 11272 \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in 11273 \txipagewidth = \hsize 11274 % 11275 \normaloffset = #4\relax 11276 \bindingoffset = #5\relax 11277 % 11278 \ifpdf 11279 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11280 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11281 % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of 11282 % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with. 11283 \pdfhorigin = 1 true in 11284 \pdfvorigin = 1 true in 11285 \else 11286 \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined 11287 \special{papersize=#8,#7}% 11288 \else 11289 \pdfpageheight #7\relax 11290 \pdfpagewidth #8\relax 11291 % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin. 11292 \fi 11293 \fi 11294 % 11295 \setleading{\textleading} 11296 % 11297 \parindent = \defaultparindent 11298 \setemergencystretch 11299} 11300 11301% @letterpaper (the default). 11302\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11303 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11304 \textleading = 13.2pt 11305 % 11306 % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. 11307 \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines 11308 {\voffset}{.25in}% 11309 {\bindingoffset}{36pt}% 11310 {11in}{8.5in}% 11311}} 11312 11313% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size. 11314\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11315 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt 11316 \textleading = 12pt 11317 % 11318 \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}% 11319 {-.2in}{0in}% 11320 {\bindingoffset}{16pt}% 11321 {9.25in}{7in}% 11322 % 11323 \lispnarrowing = 0.3in 11324 \tolerance = 700 11325 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11326 \defbodyindent = .5cm 11327}} 11328 11329% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size. 11330% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.) 11331\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1 11332 \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt 11333 \textleading = 12pt 11334 % 11335 \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}% 11336 {-.2in}{-.4in}% 11337 {0pt}{14pt}% 11338 {9in}{6in}% 11339 % 11340 \lispnarrowing = 0.25in 11341 \tolerance = 700 11342 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11343 \defbodyindent = .4cm 11344}} 11345 11346% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. 11347\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11348 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11349 \textleading = 13.2pt 11350 % 11351 % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050 11352 % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm. 11353 % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust 11354 % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then 11355 % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in 11356 % your texinfo source file like this: 11357 % @tex 11358 % \global\normaloffset = -6mm 11359 % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm 11360 % @end tex 11361 \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines 11362 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11363 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11364 {297mm}{210mm}% 11365 % 11366 \tolerance = 700 11367 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11368 \defbodyindent = 5mm 11369}} 11370 11371% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper. 11372% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000. 11373% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small. 11374\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1 11375 \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt 11376 \textleading = 12.5pt 11377 % 11378 \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}% 11379 {\voffset}{\hoffset}% 11380 {\bindingoffset}{8pt}% 11381 {210mm}{148mm}% 11382 % 11383 \lispnarrowing = 0.2in 11384 \tolerance = 800 11385 \contentsrightmargin = 0pt 11386 \defbodyindent = 2mm 11387 \tableindent = 12mm 11388}} 11389 11390% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. 11391\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 11392 \afourpaper 11393 \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}% 11394 {\voffset}{4.6mm}% 11395 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11396 {297mm}{210mm}% 11397 % 11398 % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper. 11399 \globaldefs = 0 11400}} 11401 11402% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format. 11403\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1 11404 \afourpaper 11405 \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}% 11406 {\voffset}{-2.95mm}% 11407 {\bindingoffset}{7mm}% 11408 {297mm}{210mm}% 11409 \globaldefs = 0 11410}} 11411 11412% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] 11413% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, 11414% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. 11415% 11416\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} 11417\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% 11418 \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi 11419 \globaldefs = 1 11420 % 11421 \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt 11422 \setleading{\textleading}% 11423 % 11424 \dimen0 = #1\relax 11425 \advance\dimen0 by \voffset 11426 % 11427 \dimen2 = \hsize 11428 \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset 11429 % 11430 \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}% 11431 {\voffset}{\normaloffset}% 11432 {\bindingoffset}{44pt}% 11433 {\dimen0}{\dimen2}% 11434}} 11435 11436% Set default to letter. 11437% 11438\letterpaper 11439 11440% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes. 11441\hfuzz = 1pt 11442 11443 11444\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} 11445 11446\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment 11447 11448% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice. 11449\catcode`\^^? = 14 11450 11451% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. 11452\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"} 11453\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix 11454\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+} 11455\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<} 11456\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>} 11457\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^} 11458\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_} 11459\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|} 11460\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~} 11461 11462% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt 11463% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts, 11464% where something hairier probably needs to be done. 11465% 11466% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print 11467% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero 11468% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all 11469% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter. 11470% 11471\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11472 11473% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches 11474% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from 11475% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway 11476% this is not a problem. 11477\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi} 11478 11479% Set catcodes for Texinfo file 11480 11481% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph. 11482% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can 11483% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. 11484% 11485\catcode`\"=\active 11486\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} 11487\let"=\activedoublequote 11488\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde 11489\chardef\hatchar=`\^ 11490\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat 11491 11492\catcode`\_=\active 11493\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} 11494\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em } 11495\let\realunder=_ 11496 11497\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}} 11498 11499\chardef \less=`\< 11500\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless 11501\chardef \gtr=`\> 11502\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr 11503\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}} 11504\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix 11505\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash 11506 11507 11508% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page 11509% breaks in the middle of an @tex block. 11510\def\texinfochars{% 11511 \let< = \activeless 11512 \let> = \activegtr 11513 \let~ = \activetilde 11514 \let^ = \activehat 11515 \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 11516 \let\b = \strong 11517 \let\i = \smartitalic 11518 % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too. 11519} 11520 11521% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after 11522% parsing them. 11523\def\turnoffactive{% 11524 \normalturnoffactive 11525 \otherbackslash 11526} 11527 11528\catcode`\@=0 11529 11530% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font, 11531% as in \char`\\. 11532\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\ 11533\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work 11534 11535% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and 11536% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines). 11537{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}} 11538 11539% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash 11540% in fixed width font. 11541\catcode`\\=\active % @ for escape char from now on. 11542 11543% Print a typewriter backslash. For math mode, we can't simply use 11544% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char 11545% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol 11546% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex 11547% sets \mathcode`\\="026E). Hence we use an explicit \mathchar, 11548% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam; 11549% ignored family value; char position "5C). We can't use " for the 11550% usual hex value because it has already been made active. 11551 11552@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}} 11553@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents. 11554 11555% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont. 11556% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with 11557% catcode other. We switch back and forth between these. 11558@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont} 11559@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash} 11560 11561% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of 11562% the literal character `\'. 11563% 11564{@catcode`- = @active 11565 @gdef@normalturnoffactive{% 11566 @passthroughcharstrue 11567 @let-=@normaldash 11568 @let"=@normaldoublequote 11569 @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix 11570 @let+=@normalplus 11571 @let<=@normalless 11572 @let>=@normalgreater 11573 @let^=@normalcaret 11574 @let_=@normalunderscore 11575 @let|=@normalverticalbar 11576 @let~=@normaltilde 11577 @let\=@ttbackslash 11578 @markupsetuplqdefault 11579 @markupsetuprqdefault 11580 @unsepspaces 11581 } 11582} 11583 11584% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file 11585% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. 11586% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on. 11587@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other 11588 11589% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo' 11590% 11591% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. 11592% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing 11593% a backslash. 11594% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after 11595% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error. 11596% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex. 11597% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden. 11598{ 11599@catcode`@^=7 11600@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{% 11601 @global@let\ = @eatinput% 11602 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11603 @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}% 11604 % Definition for the newline at the end of this file. 11605 @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}% 11606 % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file. 11607 @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}% 11608 % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it 11609 @let@originalparsearg@parsearg 11610 @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg} 11611}} 11612 11613{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13% 11614@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}} 11615 11616% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token 11617% appears by mistake. 11618{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13% 11619@gdef@enableemergencynewline{% 11620 @gdef^^M{% 11621 @par% 11622 %<warning: active newline>@par% 11623}}} 11624 11625 11626@gdef@fixbackslash{% 11627 @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi 11628 @catcode13=5 % regular end of line 11629 @enableemergencynewline 11630 @let@c=@texinfoc 11631 @let@parsearg@originalparsearg 11632 % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input 11633 % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. 11634 @catcode`+=@active 11635 @catcode`@_=@active 11636 % 11637 % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. 11638 % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. This macro, @fixbackslash, gets 11639 % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file. Not opening texinfo.cnf 11640 % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format 11641 % file for Texinfo. 11642 % 11643 @openin 1 texinfo.cnf 11644 @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi 11645 @closein 1 11646} 11647 11648 11649% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages. 11650@escapechar = `@@ 11651 11652% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need 11653% active definitions as the normal characters. 11654@def@normaldot{.} 11655@def@normalquest{?} 11656@def@normalslash{/} 11657 11658% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. 11659% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line. 11660@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&} 11661@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#} 11662@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%} 11663 11664@let @hashchar = @normalhash 11665 11666@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and 11667@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we 11668@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars. 11669@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments. 11670@catcode`@'=@active 11671@catcode`@`=@active 11672@markupsetuplqdefault 11673@markupsetuprqdefault 11674 11675@c Local variables: 11676@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) 11677@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page" 11678@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" 11679@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H" 11680@c time-stamp-end: "}" 11681@c End: 11682 11683@c vim:sw=2: 11684 11685@enablebackslashhack 11686
